JP6721838B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

Pachinko game machines.

The most popular pachinko game machines at present are called "special symbols" (or main game symbols) on the display of 7-segment etc. when a game ball enters the starting opening (start chucker). When the special symbol is variably displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special game state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal game state (the large winning opening in the normal state is closed) This is a type of machine (a so-called "first-class pachinko game machine") in which (a so-called attacker) shifts to a game of which contents are opened under a predetermined condition}. Here, in order to reduce the load of the display control of the special symbol that is directly connected to the profit of the player, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol", it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for production to enhance the interest of the game. The symbol to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation of the decorative symbol is also started in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in the specific mode (for example, “7”), the decorative symbol is also in the predetermined mode in accordance with this (for example, It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative pattern in a predetermined mode.

Here, since the mechanism is common in this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the symbol The focus is on giving.

JP, 2010-158382, A JP, 2010-110479, A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-156039 JP2011-156041A

However, since the rendering method performed while the design is changing has been widely used, there is a problem in that the control method thereof needs to be further improved in order to improve the interest.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning a prize mouth that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display productions,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls display control of production,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number storage unit that stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied,
Game content determination means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number, and determining a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/no judgment result,
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part according to the determination by the game content determination means,
Special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize mouth can be in an advantageous state for the player, after the win/no win determination result based on the random number is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening than the normal game state, and is configured to be in the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game,
At least a first variation table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information in the specific game state, and a second variation table in which the first variation table has a different tendency of selecting the variation display time of the identification information. It has at least a first variation table reference state that refers to the first variation table in the specific gaming state and a second variation table reference state that refers to the second variation table in the specific gaming state,
The first variation table can be referred to in the specific period in the specific game state, and after the variation display of the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of execution of the special game, the second variation from the first variation table reference state. It is configured to be in a table reference state,
In the case of the first fluctuation table reference state, the number of holdings when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings A, and the number of holdings when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is more than the number of holdings A. When the number of holdings B, which is a number, is different from the case where the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-win, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is different. (2) In the case of the fluctuation table reference state, when the number of holdings when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings A and when the number of holdings when the winning/failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings B With, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information when the result of the win/loss judgment by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is configured to be the same,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a special game in the effect display unit before satisfying the hit/absence determination permission condition,
The execution frequency of the prefetching effect is configured to be different between the case of the first variation table reference state and the case of the second variation table reference state,
If the pending display occurs before the second fluctuation table reference state is entered, but the variable display of the identification information related to the pending in the second fluctuation table reference state is scheduled, the second fluctuation It is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect corresponding to the hold during the variable display of the identification information prior to the table reference state,
In the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state, it is possible to execute a predetermined exclusive effect,
In the case where the result of the determination result corresponding to the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state is a non-winning or a winning, the dedicated effect can be executed, while (1) The effect content after executing the dedicated effect in the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the variation table reference state corresponds to the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state. It is configured to differ depending on whether the result of the winning/disapproving judgment is non-winning or winning ,
The hold information A and the hold information B are at least held as hold information related to the hold that is scheduled to be the non-winning result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied.
In the case of the first fluctuation table reference state, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information when the hold corresponding to the hold information A satisfies the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition, and the hold corresponding to the hold information B is determined to be right or wrong. While the tendency of selection of the variable display time of the identification information when the permission condition is satisfied is different, while the second variation table reference state is satisfied, the hold corresponding to the hold information A satisfies the right/wrong determination permission condition. The tendency of selecting the variable display time of the identification information and the tendency of selecting the variable display time of the identification information when the hold corresponding to the hold information B satisfies the right/wrong judgment permission condition are configured to be the same.
The hold related to the hold information B is configured to be more likely to be a trigger to execute the prefetching effect than the hold related to the hold information A,
When all of the one or more reservations that satisfy the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition before the certain hold are the hold related to the hold information A, a predetermined prefetch effect can be executed for the certain hold.
If all of the one or more holds that satisfy the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition before the certain hold include the hold related to the hold information B instead of the hold related to the hold information A, a predetermined hold is performed for the certain hold. It is configured not to execute the prefetch effect of
As types of prefetching effect, at least prefetching effect A that is a certain type of prefetching effect, and prefetching effect B that is a type of prefetching effect different from prefetching effect A are configured,
While the pre-reading effect A and the pre-reading effect B can be executed at the same time, it is possible to start the execution of the pre-reading effect B while the pre-reading effect A is being executed, and it is displayed by the variable display of the previous identification information. Pre-reading effect A in a display mode different from the display mode of the pre-reading effect A, and in a display mode different from the display mode of the pre-reading effect B displayed in the variable display of the previous identification information. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the timing of displaying B.
<Appendix>
Note that other modes different from this mode will be listed below, but the invention can be carried out without being limited thereto.
Pachinko gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the predetermined ball inlet (for example, , The second main game starting opening B10) is easy to enter the game ball as compared to the state where the game ball can enter or is closed, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls display control of effects,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win/fail judgment based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/no judgment result.
According to the determination by the game content determination means, an identification information display control means (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) that controls to display the identification information in a variable display on the identification information display portion and then stop the identification information.
After the win/no win determination result based on the random number is selected and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize (for example, the first special winning a prize C10, the second special winning a prize C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. When the special game to be obtained can be executed and the stop display mode of the identification information is a predetermined type mode, the predetermined prize to the variable winning port (for example, the first special winning port C10, the second special winning port C20) A first special game in which a unit game in which a variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first special winning prize C10, a second special winning prize C20) can be opened is executed a plurality of times until there are a certain number of balls or a predetermined period has elapsed. When the stop display mode of the identification information is a specific type mode different from the predetermined type mode, the variable winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) Second execution of a unit game in which the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first prize winning mouth C10, the second prize winning mouth C20) can be opened until a predetermined number of balls have entered or a predetermined period has elapsed Special game control means for executing a special game (for example, special game control means MP30),
There is a low-probability lottery state in which the win/loss determination result is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the win/loss determination result is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, before and after the execution of the first special game. , While controlling so that the game state related to the low-probability lottery state and the high-probability lottery state can change, before and after the execution of the second special game, the game state relating to the low-probability lottery state and the high-probability lottery state changes Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that controls not to do so,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side. MT) and
As the content of execution of the first special game, one of a first high profit special game in which the expected number of prize balls is a predetermined number and a first low profit special game in which the expected number of prize balls is less than the predetermined number are executed. Is possible,
When the stop display mode of the identification information is the first stop display mode among the predetermined types of modes, the high probability lottery state is set after the first high profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is In the case of the second stop display mode of the predetermined type of mode, after the first low profit special game is executed, it becomes a low probability lottery state, and the stop display mode of the identification information is of the predetermined type of mode. In the case of the third stop display mode of, it is configured to be in a high probability lottery state after the first low profit special game is executed,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) is
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game part,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display control unit (for example, for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20) and
Equipped with
After the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, it is possible to display predetermined effect display contents, and when the predetermined effect display contents are displayed, identification information is displayed. Is displayed as a unit after the variable display is displayed until the display is stopped, and the predetermined rendering is performed until the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number after the predetermined rendering display content is displayed. It is configured to continuously display the display content,
When the special game is executed due to the stop display mode of the identification information being the first stop display mode on the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side, the main game unit (for example, main control) When a special game is executed because the stop display mode of the identification information on the board M) side is the second stop display mode, the identification information on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side When a special game is executed due to the stop display mode being the third stop display mode, and the stop display mode of the identification information on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side is When the special game is executed due to being a specific type of aspect, it is configured so that the effect display content common in any of the above can be displayed as the predetermined effect display content,
It is a numerical value that suggests or informs the period during which the predetermined effect display content is continuously displayed after the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, and the numerical value is large. It is configured to set, as the predetermined number of times, a numerical value determined so that the degree of expectation of becoming a high-probability lottery state after the special game is executed is high.
After the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, the number of times of repeating the one unit has reached the predetermined number of times after the display of the predetermined effect display contents is started. After that, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the main gaming section (for example, the main control board M) is configured to definitely notify the player whether or not the high probability lottery state is established. Is.

According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the control method relating to the effect performed while the symbol is changing.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is completed. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a second main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prefetching execution effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the variable additional time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process during additional time on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state of retracting inside the game board (opposite side of the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In a configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take "there is", the advancing state = easy winning state, and the withdrawal state = non-winning state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number, a hard random number). Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning/non-winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine a stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. When determining the contents of the variation mode and the contents of the final identification information, it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number acquired by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number... Is called one random number) .. Further, for example, one kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening may be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation with a high probability of lottery game state, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth) In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the open result of the variable member is short), and the like. “The average value is uniform regardless of the number of holdings” means that the variable time is selected without depending on the number of holdings, but other regulation contents include (1) loss In the stop symbol "HA", the first difference appears in the average value of the variation time in the number of reserves a and the average value of the variation time in the number of reserves b, which is the number of reserves larger than the number of reserves a, and the stop related to the loss In the design "HB", there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations a and the average value of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations b, or the second difference appears rather than the first difference, and the second Is a difference is smaller than the first difference, (2) at the time of the stop symbol "HA" related to the loss in the number of holdings c (for example, the number of holdings 4), is assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected. In the random number range, the ratio occupied by the random number range that is assigned for the most easily selected variation mode is set as the occupancy rate α, and at the time of the stop symbol “HB” related to the loss in the hold number c (for example, the hold number 4) , In the random number range assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected, when the occupancy rate β is the proportion of the random number range assigned to the variation mode that is most easily selected, the occupancy rate α is larger than the occupancy rate β. Is higher (that is, the variation mode that is most likely to be selected is more likely to be concentrated and selected).

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko gaming machines such as general electric officers). .. Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the locations and functions of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means that performs the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood as modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery table and a reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa.

Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, speakers D24 are provided on the left and right of the upper portion of the game machine, and a sound effect according to the game state and the like is output.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of game nails, mechanisms such as a windmill and various general winning openings, which are not shown, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance at the time of entering the ball. Generates mouth entrance information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting mouth B10 includes a second main game starting mouth ball entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting opening ball entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the second main game starting opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state where the game ball is hard to win the second main game starting port B10 and an open state where the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the presence of the first main game starting opening A10 causes the second main game to start. The upper part of the game starting opening B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start openings A10. And, it is configured to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically stacked, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port is also possible. A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 may be arranged separately. In such a case, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d may be provided. Further, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10, and thus the game area D30 The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, but may be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is equipped with an auxiliary game starting port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game start entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game start entrance ball information that indicates the entrance of the game ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) is easily guided, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided (however, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right of the outlet D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) flows down. The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area in which the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in a horizontal rectangular shape, which is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the outlet D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the first special winning opening electric auditors C11d (and the first big winning Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first special winning opening C10, and the first big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker) and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second winning prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker, and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 types of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the maximum number of holdings of four lamps can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set so that it is inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), a later-described effect A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image display including a decorative pattern that fluctuates/stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol/second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is executed including variable display of a decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations that imitate a game of a slot machine, for example, with a first holding display unit SG12 (and a second holding display unit SG13) that displays main game holding information. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is linked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations not executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by blinking or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Main control board M that performs (control directly related to the profit of the person), and production control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control relating to various productions on the production display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winning in each prize hole, an upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. A launch device D42 for launching one ball to the area D30, a launch control board D40 for controlling the launch operation of the launch device D42, a power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a power supply for the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on and off, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E, which supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board, is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation/stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units, a sub-sub-control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display/stop display, hold display, and advance notice display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to have an unused area in order to prevent a program etc. modified by an illegal act from being written. It is suitable (for example, the unused area is filled with 0s, the used area is written in a young address, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent you from referring to data that you do not normally refer to due to noise or fraudulent activity, you can use unused data (for example, data that is referred to by a game machine with different specifications or used only for testing in the development stage). It is preferable to configure so as not to provide (data etc.). Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used by filling a young address and the unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate/device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M is a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, and 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, general winning opening is a winning opening that does not carry out symbol lottery although there is a winning ball )}, drive solenoids (not shown) (the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), and the like, which are indispensable for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM/sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production/game etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board. The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) is also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately from the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects as described above. .. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub controller SS. Is configured. In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit in that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first/second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and is communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS) for performing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, etc. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And a ROM, a RAM, and an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

First, the main control board M, game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of information for the game, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, the progress of games such as special games and specific games. The game progressing means MP that controls the current game state and the past game state [for example, a state related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), special game state}, auxiliary game state (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on/off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and prize number information) ] The game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing etc., and various game information on the game peripheral side {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} , Information transmission control means MT (and a command transmission buffer for accumulating untransmitted commands) for transmitting information regarding variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal/state information/end signal, hold information, etc. MT10) and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on winning of game balls into various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like), and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entering each starting opening during variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progression means MP is a display control means MP10 for performing control to change and stop display of each symbol, and to directly determine whether to open or close the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. A second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the first big prize without deciding which game state the current game state is to be transitioned to and transitioning the game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) It has a small hitting game control means MP40 that controls the execution of a small hitting game that can open the mouth C10, and a specific game control means MP50 that performs processing for shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the entrance determination means MJ10 is a first main game starting opening determining means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main starting opening A10, and a second main opening opening. Second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game starting opening for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10. To the first winning a prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first major winning opening C10 It has a second special winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 determines whether to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-A for acquiring a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main number) according to the determination result. Second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B for acquiring game symbol determination random number, etc., and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result. Random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and the specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or "allocated according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing values along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears. ) Is defined by a value having a random value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like. By obtaining a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult for a player to expect. On the contrary, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number by using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30, the hold digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the process related to hold digestion and variation start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol variation permission has not come down. It is determined whether to temporarily store, based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission comes down. -A, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in the situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been obtained, and based on the determination result, the random number is permitted to change the symbol. Until the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation that the auxiliary game symbol variation permission is not down temporarily It is determined whether or not to store, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number based on the determination result in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is given, Have

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four, the random numbers are combined with the holding order. In order to temporarily store in the form, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively. Have

Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the special game is successful and the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11.
Winning lottery means MN10 that draws whether or not the opening of d is possible, and special game transition determining means MN20 that makes a transition decision to a special game when the result of the winning lottery is a win (for example, the hit flag is internally turned on). And, based on each random number, the symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol, and the variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. The limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency described later. Here, the win/loss lottery means MN10 is a first main game win/win lottery means MN11-A for performing win/win lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game win/win lottery means for performing win/loss lottery on the second main game symbol. It has an MN11-B and an auxiliary game win/loss lottery means MN11-H for performing a win/loss lot with respect to the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game win/loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win/win lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win/win lottery means MN11-H are referred to when the win/win lottery regarding the first main game symbol is performed. The first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A, and the second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when the win/win lottery regarding the second main game symbol is performed, and the win/loss lot about the auxiliary game symbol Each has an auxiliary game win/loss table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. Further, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the time of the limitation frequency, such as the gaming state and the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. Which of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta at the time of the limited frequency A is referred to. Which of the limited frequency counter AMN52c that counts the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is referred to when determining the frequency Limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 that counts the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game in order to determine, and limited frequency related for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (flag ON/OFF, etc.) And an information temporary storage means MN52b. When the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) MN51ta-B) and (1) refer to a common table to change the selection rate of the variation mode (that is, the variation mode to be selected is the same, but the selection rate is different), (2) The variation mode to be selected and the selection rate are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode, (3) different variation mode {first main game variation mode There is a variation mode which does not exist in the determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), and (4) all variable modes that can be selected are configured to be different. Good. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, the limited frequency, the type and/or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Is different from the type and/or the selection rate (a limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is selected only in a specific fluctuation period). In addition, as a trigger to become the limited frequency state, in addition to the stop of a specific symbol, the opening of the special winning opening, the stop of the design (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, etc.) that triggers the opening of the special winning prize, a certain timing A predetermined number of fluctuations may be made from (timing such as start of fluctuation after stop of a specific symbol, start of fluctuation after stop). Incidentally, the special fluctuation pattern table, each gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortened gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortened gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming State and non-time reduction game state) main game table 3 (not only referred to within the limited period in the current game state, next big hit, small hit or a specific symbol in the current game state) Other than the variation mode determination lottery table that is referred to until the stop). In addition, the state referring to the lottery table MN52ta for determining the limited frequency variation mode will be hereinafter referred to as the limited frequency (particularly, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is easily opened). When the frequency is A, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is sometimes referred to as a limited frequency B), a limited frequency state, a limited frequency medium, etc.

Here, when executing the winning/winning lottery based on the main game random number, the winning/winning lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the hit random number values, or When a part or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, it is determined whether or not the main game random number value is less than or equal to the upper limit value of the hit random number value and greater than or equal to the lower limit value, to thereby determine whether or not the random number .. Accurate determination processing can be executed by executing such a hit/miss judgment. On the contrary, in the case of performing the judgment of acceptance by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits of the storage area easily become 0 or 1). There is a risk of In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery (if a plurality of random numbers is used in one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Must be prevented from synchronizing}.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and acquisition Based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/losing result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→first main game normal game state) (Lottery table, probability variation game->first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game->first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/discarding result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→second main game normal game state lottery). (Table, probability variation game→second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game→second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the gaming state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number). The auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number, and.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/losing result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→first main game normal Gaming state lottery table, probability variation game→first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game→first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning/losing result/game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game→second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. On the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g of the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 for controlling the stop display after changing the first main game symbol, a predetermined time assistance It has auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling the stop display after changing the game symbol.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes a timer MP11t-H for auxiliary game symbol variation management capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening/closing the second main gaming starting entrance electric auditors object B11d is satisfied. 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening and closing condition decision means MP21-B and the second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t which measures the drive (opening) time of the 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d -B and.

Next, the special game control means MP30, the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transition condition when the special game transition condition is satisfied, the contents of the special game. (Specifically, a special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) is determined, and the special game content determination means MP32 to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second special winning opening C20 under predetermined conditions, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first special winning opening) C10 and the special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the second special winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 is the first and second special winning opening electric prize opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric prize C11d and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d. , And has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table. Details are not shown).

Next, small hitting game control means MP40, small hitting game timer MP41t which measures the opening time of the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 in the small hitting game, and the small hitting game related information which temporarily stores the information related to the small hitting game. And a temporary storage means MP40b.

Next, the specific game control means MP50 meets the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the probability variation game state end condition is satisfied, and whether or not the time reduction game state end condition is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the probability of being drawn to a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time shortening game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time reduction. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also shortened relatively, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game without time limit). except for). That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability for each symbol variation. It may have a function of performing (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB, the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop) First/second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of hours saved, ON/OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the currently changing first or second main game symbol (first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is an auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (the auxiliary game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the production controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 that can display the stop and change of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can perform stop display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first/second main game common peripheral device C is in the closed state during the normal game, and is opened under the predetermined condition during the special game (big hit). And has the second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, the effect display control unit (sub-main control unit) SM, the display information receiving unit SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the determination process and the display control process of the effect content related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 for controlling the above, and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub controller SS side. The above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing the symbol information and the display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 which controls the determination process and the display control process of the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the holding of the design symbol which controls the reserved number management and the retained display process of the decorative symbol. The information display control means SM22, the hold-ahead read effect execution control means SM26 for executing the hold-ahead read effect, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination processing and the display control processing, and the notice effect content determination processing and It has advance notice display control means SM24 that controls the display control processing, and reach production display control means SM25 that controls the determination processing and display control processing of the reach production content.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M, and is related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol and the design display content determining means SM21n that determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol. Design information related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop design information, various flags, etc.), and a design variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative design. ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

Next, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 has a drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to suspension of a decorative symbol.

Next, the holding prefetching effect execution control means SM26, a holding prefetching effect execution possibility determining means SM26k for determining whether or not the holding prefetching effect can be executed, and a prefetching related information temporary storage means SM26b for temporarily storing information related to the holding prefetching. ,have.

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information on the background effect display and the background effect display content determination means SM23n that determines the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for, and a stay stage {group of effects, if the stay stage is different, the notice effect, background effect, reach effect, sound mode, etc. may be different (or may be different). When the user stays in the "awakening stage", the awakening stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of fluctuations in staying in the "awakening stage" and the staying in the "devil stage" of the staying stages In this case, the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 for measuring the number of fluctuations of staying on the “devil stage” is included.

Next, the notice effect display control means SM24, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n for determining the display content and the display timing of the notice effect, and information related to the notice effect display. And a preliminary effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, a sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and an image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. And a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control section SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flow chart is mainly composed of processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start/end/return (illustrated by rounded rectangles). .. Further, in the case where the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the reference to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle whose left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, in the game machine development stage, game machines with different specifications are also being developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine executed by the game machine with different specifications (in the processing on the main side, Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left, and processing that is related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or cheating.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial setting (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM area are saved in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is present). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM). If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M stores various data stored in the RAM of the main control board M (backed up) at the time of power interruption. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and the control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M causes an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 9B is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured so as not to be a value at which the special game is executed (noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Therefore, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game has been executed).

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes a later-described auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric auditors product drive determination processing described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc. based on the winning opening in which the game ball wins). The payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, and the processing for managing the result) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, a process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M decides to transmit the commands (the order in which the commands are set).

Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. To be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interruption), in step 1020, the main control board M sets information (for example, a checksum) when the power is cut off based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflowed or passed in the case of a gate) in the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether the holding balls are not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). Determine whether. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a random number with the information indicating how many numbers are held in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. Is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric auditors opening flag is OFF. Or not. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball for the auxiliary game symbol. .. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). Along with the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game shortened flag). When is ON, a winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is OFF) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). A predetermined time relating to the variable time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball concerned with the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached. To do. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired assist. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “win”. If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game shortened flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game shortened flag is off. Seconds). Next, at step 1234, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric auditors opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d. Next, at step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B to determine the opening time of the electric auditors. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d, and the auxiliary gaming state is temporarily turned on. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the memory means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

In addition, if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process moves to (processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting entrance ball determining means MJ11-A determines the first main game starting entrance detecting information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main starting opening A10. Is received. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning/non-winning lottery random number for determining win/fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, at step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b to refer to the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag. Is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the hold control unit MJ30 preliminarily determines the hit result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold, based on the hold information (win/win lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1316, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated hold success/failure result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the pre-determined stop symbol is configured to be transmitted to the sub side, the pre-determination result is the stop symbol related to the loss of the first main game, “HA”. In this case, a command relating to a different stop symbol will be transmitted to the sub side in the case of “HB” (as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of stop symbols relating to a loss). ing).

Next, in step 1318, the hold control unit MJ30, based on the hold information (random number for determining the variation mode), the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode group (non-time saving variation aspect group and time saving variation aspect). Group) is pre-determined (for the variation mode random number segment information and the variation mode group, see the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17). In this embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation time). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub-main controller SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1322. In the case where the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the present embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as the effect executed on the sub side. In such a case, It is desirable that the player can be notified of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is the big hit (notice the stop symbol only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the big hit). Also, in the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310 or step 1312, the process moves to step 1322.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs). Is configured to determine.

The main game content determination random number information, the winning/discarding random number segment information, the variation mode random number segment information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the suspension occurs. The information to be transmitted to, is not limited to this, information on the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information on the profit mode of the main game symbol that is a big hit (the number of rounds of special games related to the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), the hold number immediately after the hold winning (only the hold number on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, or the hold number of both the first main game side and the second main game side) May be configured to be able to transmit information related to, etc. {The winning/discarding random number segment information is each gaming state on the first main gaming side (second main gaming side) and a random number value (or a random number value range). It is one of the random number delimiter information that is grouped by associating with the winning/winning lottery result, for example, whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-probability variation game state, it is a loss, a probability variation game state Even if it is a non-stochastic variation game state, it is a hit, and if it is a probability variation game state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-stochastic variation game state, it can be grouped such as losing}.

Next, in step 1322, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B uses the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main game starting entrance B10 to enter the second main game starting entrance. Determine whether information has been received. If Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B to refer to the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to (side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1324, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning/missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, are obtained as in the first main game content determining means. By the way, an acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and an acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, a win/loss lottery random number for the first main game and a win/loss lottery random number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1328, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1330, the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b to refer to the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag. It is determined whether or not is on. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the hold control means MJ30 preliminarily determines the hit result and the stop symbol relating to the stored hold, based on the hold information (win/win lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated hold success/failure result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1338.

In addition, in the case of No in step 1330, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. If Yes in step 1332, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process moves to step 1334.

Next, in step 1338, the hold control means MJ30, based on the hold information (random number for determining the variation mode), the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode group (non-time saving variation aspect group and time saving variation aspect). Group) is pre-determined (for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, see the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17). Next, in step 1340, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

Although the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1328, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information relating to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting lost). Further, for the win/loss lottery random number, a change in the game state (from the already-recorded pending game state of the hold state) after the win/win lottery random number is acquired until the win/loss lottery related to the win/loss lottery random number is executed. Not only the change but also the change in the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win/win lottery associated with the lottery random number may be unpredictable), so the win/win lottery The lottery random number is stored until the process is executed. In the present embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the information on hold can be transmitted only in the non-time shortened game state when the hold occurs in the first main game, while in the time shortened game state. Is configured to be transmitted only when the hold related to the second main game occurs, regardless of which game state is the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game. The command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. In addition, a specific example of the command relating to the result information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D000H: out, D001H: out of low accuracy, hit in high accuracy, D002H: hit in both low accuracy and high accuracy, D003H : Small hit", and a specific example of the command relating to the stop symbol information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability change hit, D101H: 16R non-accurate change hit, D102H: 2R probability change hit", A specific example of the command relating to the variation mode random number delimiter information transmitted to the main control unit SM is "D200H: Delimiter 1 (group 1 in the time-reduced gaming state, group 1 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, group 1 in the limited frequency state). , D201H: Break 2 (Group 1 for time-reduced game status, Group 2 for non-time-reduced game status, Group 1 for limited frequency status), D202H: Break 3 (Group 2 for time-reduced game status, non-time-reduced game status) Group 2, group 1) if the frequency is limited.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the second main game symbol hold is present. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400(2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball for the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball for the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the holding digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the variation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and is not changing the main game symbol, and there is a hold of the main game symbol, and it is not during the small hit game. Is a condition. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variable start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the holding digestion control means MJ31, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) Temporarily stored, while reading the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) relating to the current symbol variation, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game The symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information that is temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1408, the win/loss lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and refers to the first main Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol win/win lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in the present embodiment, the hit (so-called small hit) that the game state cannot be shifted is illustrated, but a small hit may not occur (small hit is won). Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of loss symbols on the first main game side (two types of "HA" and "HB" in this example), while a single loss symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, "HC") is present. The number of lost symbols on the first main game (second main game) side is merely an example, and there is no limitation to this (for example, the number of lost symbols on the first main game side may be three or more). , The first main game side missing symbol is singular and the second main game side missing symbol is plural, or both the first main game side and the second main gaming side have plural missing symbols, etc. ). Further, in the present example, in the lost symbol on the first main game side, the ratio of "HA" is configured to be higher than the ratio of "HB", but the present invention is not limited to this (for example, "HB" The ratio may be configured to be higher than the ratio of “HA”, or these ratios may be equivalent).

Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination For lottery table MN41ta-B), refer to the main game symbol win/loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the design lottery random number). Is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "3A/4A/5A/7A-9A" and "3B/4B/5B・7B”), one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game and the opening time of the special winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol, 3A, 3B and 4B are 2R short open big hit (compared with the long opening big hit 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B are 4R long open big hits (big wins where the opening time of the special winning opening is longer than short open big hits), 7A and 7B Is a 16R long open big hit (a big hit whose opening time is longer than a short open big hit). It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. 2 types), one type (one type of "HC") is provided on the second main game side, but is not limited to this, and both the first main game side and the second main game side, A plurality of types of lost symbols may be provided, and any one of the lost symbols on the first main game side and the second main game side may be configured}.

Next, in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b to determine the limited frequency. It is determined whether the A flag is on. If Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) performs limited frequency A variation mode determination processing, which will be described later. The process moves to step 1418. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1412, at step 1414, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) determines the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Is checked to determine whether the limited frequency B flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) performs limited frequency B variation mode determination processing, which will be described later. The process moves to step 1418. If NO in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) determines the first main game variation corresponding to each game state. Refer to the lottery table MN51ta-A for mode determination (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), and refer to the main game symbol win/loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (Especially, the variation mode lottery random number) determines the variation mode of the main game symbol, temporarily stores these in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and proceeds to step 1418.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). In the figure, not only the main game table 3 but also the limited frequency table is shown at the same time, which will be described later). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, based on the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time saving flag state, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol for a certain random number value can be determined Has been done. For example, for a random number value, if the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game The state) is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short can be easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be separated for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

Further, as shown in this figure (in particular, FIG. 15), in this example, with respect to the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol (at the time of holding digestion) When the symbol to be stopped) is "HA", it is easy to select a variation mode in which the variation is short (in this example, variation time is 15 seconds or less) (that is, an effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is selected). Easy). On the other hand, in this example, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is relatively relative to that in the case of “HA”. It is easy to select a variation mode that is relatively long (in this example, variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode for a long time (for example, a variation mode for 120 seconds) is configured to be easily selected. It should be noted that it may be configured to have a plurality of types of stop symbols related to the loss on the second main game side, and in such a case, the above-described configuration (configuration related to "HA" and "HB") is the second main It may be applied to the stop symbol related to the game side loss.

Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN, the design variation display start instruction command (stop design information, stop design attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game design information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information regarding the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and a command relating to the current game state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1428.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag areas of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C to change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol fluctuation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g) is stopped, and the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means M
The display of the stop symbol stored in B11b-C is controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1550. Even if No in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1550.

Next, in step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1428, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in the present embodiment, the limited frequency A is the second main game start as described above). The limited frequency is associated with the mouth electric accessory B11d being easily opened). First, in step 1452, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value is a continuation availability value (a state in which the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is easily opened = time shortening game Is a value related to the fluctuation that can be the final fluctuation of (4) and is 41) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1) to determine the main game side random number,
Based on the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1458. Here, the continuation propriety value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c at which the time shortening game state can end, and in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be given after the end of the special game is 20 or 60 times. Therefore, the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c becomes the continuation possibility value before the start of the 20th and 60th fluctuations from the end of the special game.

Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is the continuability value (41 or 1 in this example), the limited frequency table Reference is made to A-1.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and the main game side random number and winning/non-winning lottery. As a result, based on the stop design for the main game design,
A variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1458.

Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is other than the continuability value (41 or 1 in this example), the limited frequency Reference is made to Table A-2.

Next, in step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c by one. Next, in step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and performs the next process (step 1418). Process). Even if No in step 1460, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (the limited frequency B is, as described above, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Is a limited frequency that is difficult to open). First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table B), and refers to the main game side random number, win/win lottery result, and a stop symbol for the main game symbol. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol is determined. Next, in step 1504, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 by 1. Next, step 1
At 506, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and the next process (step 1418) is performed. Process). Even if No in step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table B is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is ON.

Here, the variation mode random number segment information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information is determined for a certain random number value (or random number value range). The variation mode random number delimiter information is provided in each table when the first main game side hits (at the time of losing) and when the second main game side hits (at the time of losing). More specifically, when the second main game is lost, it is divided into two divisions, division 1 and division 2 (the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is division 1, the main game The variation mode in which the variation time of the symbol can be the longest is the division 2), and is divided into three divisions at the time of hitting the first main game side and the second main game side (of the main game symbol). The variation mode in which the variation time can be the shortest is the division 1, the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the longest is the division 3), and the division 1 to the division 4 when the first main game side is lost. It is divided into four divisions up to (the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is Division 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the longest is Division 4) ..

Also, whether the main game time saving flag is turned on/off, and whether the table to be referred to is a normal (non-limited frequency) variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table {limited frequency flag (limited frequency A flag or Limit frequency B flag) ON/OFF (further, regarding the limit frequency A flag, whether or not the count value of the limit frequency counter A is a predetermined value)}, The range is configured to be different (for example, the range of random number values is different even in the same group 1), and the variation mode random number delimiter information is transmitted to the sub side to vary according to these gaming states. The aspect group is configured to be derivable on the sub side. That is, when the game state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled when the hold occurs and the variation mode group that is executed when the hold is exhausted may differ. (For example, the variation mode group was planned to be group 1 because it was in the non-time reduction game state when the hold occurred, but the actual variation mode group was group 2 because it was in the time reduction game state when the hold was exhausted. However, regarding the variation mode random number delimiter information to which the common variation mode group is assigned over all the game states, when the sub side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (the subsequent game state It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold-ahead look-ahead effect (without considering the transition). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 means that the variation time and variation mode of the table contents are common, but (1) variation mode is different and the variation time value is different. Are the same, (2) the same production mode is executed, (3) the same production mode regardless of the game state (for example, regardless of the game state such as the probability variation game state or the non-probability variation game state) It is a table for realizing the above, and although the processing in the main control board M (assignment of variation pattern numbers, etc.) is different, the production mode may be substantially the same as “common”. Further, depending on the stop symbol (decision symbol), the candidates and/or the number of candidates of the variation mode that can be selected may be different. Further, the variation mode random number delimiter information of FIGS. 14 to 17 depends on whether it is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, and whether the winning/winning lottery result is a win or a loss. Although it is configured to form the different variation mode random number delimiter information, it is not limited to this, whether it is a variation of the first main game side or a variation of the second main game side, and whether the winning/winning lottery result is a win. It may be configured to form one variation mode random number delimiter information including whether it is a loss.

Further, as shown in the figure, in the present example, the varying time may differ depending on the number of holdings. For example, regarding the variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state, if the winning/losing lottery result is "Loss" and the loss symbol is "HA", the variation mode determination table contents to be referred to according to the number of holdings on the first main gaming side Is changed (when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3 is changed, the contents of the variation mode determination table are changed). That is, when the determination symbol when the win/loss lottery result is at the time of losing is "HA", the variation time (and the production mode) may be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variation (the variation time until the holding digest time (and the production mode). ) Can be uncertain}, while the winning/decreasing lottery result is "HB" when the determination symbol is "at the time of losing", the variable time (and the production aspect) ) Can be determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the number of holdings as a reference for switching the contents of the variation mode determination table can be changed as appropriate (for example, three divisions of 0, 1-2, or 3 or 0 divisions).・It may be divided into 4 sections of 1, 2, 3, etc.) In addition, in the case where the winning/winning lottery result is a loss, both the case where the determination symbol is “HA” and the case where it is “HB” are configured such that the variation time may differ depending on the number of holdings at the time of the variation start. You may. As a configuration example of such a configuration, (1) the difference between the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 are The configuration in which the determination symbol is "HB" is smaller than that when it is "HA" (2) The determination symbol is "HB" is more than the number when the determination symbol is "HA" The configuration may be such that the variation mode (variation time) is determined without depending (the random number range is wide).

Here, in this example, regarding the symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, if the winning/discarding lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is “HA”, the number of holdings is 0 to 1 In the case of, the random number value is “0 to 799”, the group 1 is set, and the random number value is “800 to 1023”, the group 2 is set. Is "0
In the case of "899", it becomes group 1, and in the case of a random number value of "900-1023", it becomes group 2. Therefore, when the random number value is “0 to 799”, the variation mode group is set to group 1, and when the random number value is “900 to 1023”, the variation mode group is set to group 2, but the random number value Is "800 to 899", it is unclear whether the variation mode group will be group 1 or group 2 until the hold is exhausted. In other words, if the determination symbol when the win/loss result is a loss is “HA”, the variation mode group can be uniquely determined by a random number value (or a random number value range) (in this example, “0 799” or “900 to 1023” random value) and a variation mode group that is difficult to uniquely determine (or a random value range) (in this example, “800 to 899” random value) exist. Therefore, in the case of performing a look-ahead effect for a hold in which the determination symbol is "HA" when the win/loss result is a loss, which fluctuation mode group the fluctuation actually belongs to when the hold is exhausted It may be necessary to determine the number of reservations to determine Further, it is desirable to configure so that the prefetch lottery can be executed when the newly-generated pending variation mode group is a random number value (or random number value range) that can be uniquely determined. It is possible to execute an appropriate prefetch lottery (for example, in the case where the random number value related to a certain hold is "900 to 1023", in which case the number of remaining reserves when the certain hold is exhausted is However, if it is configured that the reach effect is executed in the variation mode group of "Group 2", when the certain hold occurs, the determination regarding the certain hold is made. Even if the design is planned to be "HA", it is possible to execute the hold-ahead read-ahead effect = it is known that the reach effect finally occurs. Therefore, the hold-ahead read-ahead effect for the reach effect is set. Even if you run it, no discrepancy will occur).

In this example, the variation time included in each group is a variation time within the same range (for example, variation time is 15 seconds or less for the group 1 regardless of whether or not the game is in a time shortening game state at the time of loss). However, the variation time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the variation time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected and the time is changed). In the shortened game state, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds is selected) In such a case, a variation state group is not divided by an absolute variation time that does not depend on the game state, but a certain game state Divide the variation mode group according to the relative variation time in (for example, in the non-time shortened game state, the variation time of 10 to 15 seconds is a group 1, and in the time reduced game state, the variation time is 1 to 1.5). It may be configured such that the second fluctuation is separated from the group 1. Also, the present invention is not limited to dividing a group according to the variation time, and for example, group information divided based on the execution content of the effect (for example, one of the reach effects of the plurality of reach effects in which the character A appears is executed. This is range information in which a variation that performs one of the reach effects of the group A and a plurality of reach effects in which the character B appears is separated as a group B, that is, a big hit when the reach effect is performed. The information linked with the degree of expectation) may be transmitted to the sub side.

According to the configuration of this example, in a certain hold that is the prefetch effect, when the game state may be different between the timing when the certain hold occurs and the timing when the certain hold is exhausted (for example, the certain hold It is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect in consideration of the case where the game state shifts, such as when the hold that is digested earlier is a big hit). More specifically, with respect to a certain hold that occurred during the probability variation game state, if the non-stochastic variation game state occurs at the timing of the certain hold digestion, the variation mode group included in the variation mode random number division information regarding the certain hold is , All belong to a group with a high expected value (even if the game state changes, the expected degree of the target hold can be maintained), or the same variation mode in the probability variation game state and the non-probability variation game state When it becomes a group, it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect for the certain hold, and as the variation mode group included in the variation mode random number division information regarding the certain hold, a group with a low expected value when the non-probability variation game state is referred to. (If the expected state of the target hold may decrease due to a change in the game state), or if there are different variation mode groups in the probability variation game state and the non-probability variation game state, the certain hold It is possible to make the look-ahead effect regarding execution impossible.

Further, as an example in which the game state transitions in this way and the planned variation mode group and the variation mode group actually executed may be different, (1) there are a plurality of suspensions in the main game suspension. Under certain circumstances, a certain hold in the main game hold is digested to become a big hit (or a small hit), and the game state transitions after the special game related to the certain hold ends (or after the bonus game related to the small hit ends). For example, a transition from a non-stochastic variation game state to a stochastic variation game state), and an example in which the variation mode groups of the hold in the main game hold remaining when the certain hold is exhausted may be different, (2) Special game end After (or after the small hit) the main game symbol has changed a predetermined number of times and the game state transitions (for example, after the special game ends, the time shortened game state becomes, and the main game symbol 50 times after the special game ends). It is configured to be able to transition to a non-time shortened game state at a changed timing, etc.), and the hold that occurs before the end of the change of the main game symbol for a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game (or after the end of small hit), An example in which the variation mode groups may be different when the variation of the main game symbol of a predetermined number of times is finished after the special game is finished, (3) When the game state is the probability variation game state, the main game symbol of Configured to execute a lottery (so-called falling lottery) that shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state for each variation, trigger hold occurs in the probability variation game state, and by winning the fall lottery before the trigger hold is exhausted Examples in which the variation mode groups may differ are given.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, by turning on/off the main game time saving flag, the same variation mode group (for example, a group 1 when the main game time saving flag is on and a group when the main game time saving flag is off) Even in 1), the range of random numbers included in the same variation mode group can be different, and variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main There are a plurality of delimiters 1) at the time of hitting the lottery table for determining the game variation mode. Further, the variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main There is also a delimiter 3) when the game variation mode determination lottery table is hit. The number of types of variation mode random number division information in each table (for example, four divisions 1 to 4 when the first main game variation mode determination lottery table is lost) is the number of types of variation mode groups. (For example, when the first main game variation mode determination lottery table is lost, there are three groups 1 to 3).

Further, in the present embodiment, the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups can be selected as the variation mode group only when the variation time of a predetermined time or more (60 seconds or more in this example) is scheduled. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups is selected, the variation time is relatively long (in other words, the expectation of a big hit is high (of the variation modes that can be selected). The proportion of the jackpot will increase)). Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the group 3 may be configured to be more easily selected (the range of random numbers is wider) in the non-time-reduced game state than in the time-reduced game state (time-reduction). During the game state (especially during the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state), by making it easy to select a variation whose variation time is short, the time required for the next big hit is shortened, You can reduce stress. Also, in the time shortening game state, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is likely to be opened, the second main game starting opening B10 can be easily entered, and the situation where there is no hold is unlikely to occur}. .. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be easily selected when the group 3 is in the time reduction game state rather than in the non-time reduction game state {during the time reduction game (in particular, the probability variation game state and time During the shortened gaming state), the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than during the non-time shortened gaming state, so it is effective to use the production with a high expectation level to fuel the expectation of the player}. In addition, the policy regarding grouping of variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate, and the number of groups and the number and types of variation modes (variation time) belonging to each group are not limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in the present example, those belonging to the group 3 (group C) are “those that are scheduled to have a variation time of a predetermined time or more”, but in addition to that, “the variation time that is the longest selectable time and It may be "the one that is scheduled to occur", "the average value of the variation mode (variation time) belonging to the group is equal to or more than a predetermined time", or "the big hit is confirmed". In addition, the variation mode is associated with an effect mode (for example, lost effect, normal reach effect, super reach effect 1, super reach effect 2, jackpot confirmed super reach effect, etc.) executed by the sub-main control unit SM. You may comprise so that a group may be divided (a variation mode group corresponding to a loss production, a variation mode group corresponding to a normal reach production,..., a variation mode group corresponding to a big hit confirmed super reach production).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a random number included in the variation time period and variation mode group is determined by turning on/off the main game short-time flag and whether the table to be referred to is a normal variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table. The range of random numbers included in the variation time and/or variation mode group is different depending on whether the gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, etc. It may be configured to obtain.

Further, in this example, in the second main game variation mode determination table, in the non-probability variation state and the non-time shortening game state, a specific variation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol (In this example, the variation mode is such that the variation time is 40 seconds). With such a configuration, when the specific effect is selected, the player can recognize that the second main game symbol is the big hit symbol, and thus whether or not the specific effect is executed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by giving a variety of effects such as performing the effect of. Incidentally, this example is just an example, for example, in the non-probability variation state and non-time shortening game state, the reach effect can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, while the second main game When the symbol is a lost symbol, only the non-reach effect may be executed. In another game state (probability change state and non-time shortened game state or limited frequency state), similarly, a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is generated only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selected.

Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode of the first main game side, if the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HA”, it is referred to in the non-time shortening game state. Table contents of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table and the limited frequency table B that is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is ON (in this example, for example, when a small win is won) (For example, the variation time and variation mode group corresponding to the random number value) are the same. That is, in the present embodiment, on the first main game side, even if the variation pattern table is changed, in the non-time shortened game state, there is a lost symbol (in this example, "HA", HB" may have the same table structure) so that the contents of the table (variation time corresponding to the random number value, variation mode group, whether the variation mode depends on the number of holdings, etc.) can be the same. It is configured. Incidentally, this example is merely an example, and the contents of the table relating to the lost symbols may be changed (or may be the same) depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation game state, or the second main game side A similar configuration may be provided in the variation mode.

In addition, in this example, even if the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbols are the same (“HA” or “HB”), different variation modes can be selected depending on the gaming state. ing. For example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, in the case where the win/loss lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the variation time is 30 seconds. While only the above effects are configured to be selected, in the case of the time shortened game state, an effect having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds can be selected (specifically, non-time shortened game state). If it is, compared with the case of a time shortening game state, the effect that the variation time is short is easily selected). Furthermore, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, in which the winning/winning lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is “HA”, in the case of a time-reduced game state, in the case of a non-time-reduced game state Compared with the above, the variation mode in which the variation time is short (5 seconds in this example) is relatively easy to be selected. It should be noted that this example is an example, and the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, variation time) is configured to be selected when the determined symbols are the same even when the game state is different. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the determined symbol is "HA", the variation mode (variation time) may be different depending on the number of holdings in the non-time shortening game state {variation mode (variation time). Can depend on the number of holdings} On the other hand, in the case of a time shortening game state, the variation mode (variation time) is not different depending on the number of holdings. When the determined symbol is "HB", the variation mode (variation time) does not differ depending on the number of holdings regardless of the game state.

In addition, this example is just an example, if the win/loss lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the non-probability variation game state and non-probability The selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is long (variation time is 60 seconds or more in this example) may be different from that in the time shortening game state (more specifically, the probability variation game. In the case of the state and the non-time-reduced game state, it may be configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long (variation time is 60 seconds or more in this example). Good}. Similarly, if the win/loss lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is “HA”, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state With, the selection rate of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (variation time is 20 seconds or more in this example) may be different (more specifically, the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state). In such a case, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be increased or decreased}.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the winning/winning lottery result is a loss, the determination symbol is “HA”, and the non-time shortening game state is set, in the variation mode of the first main game side, the variation time Are configured to have groups that may differ depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, similarly, even if the determination symbol is "HA", in the variation mode of the first main game side in the case of the time shortening game state, the variation time (and the production mode) irrespective of the number of holdings at the time of holding and digesting. ) Can be determined. In addition, this example is merely an example, and, for example, in the case where the result of the lottery is lost and the determination symbol is “HA” (“HB”), the gaming state (whether or not the probability variation state and/ Or, regardless of whether or not it is a time-reduced game state), the variable time (and effect mode) may differ depending on the number of holdings at the start of variation {or, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side determination When the symbol is "HB", it may be configured to be fixed to one variable time (and effect mode) regardless of the number of holdings at the time of holding hold}.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of a suspension in which the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may differ depending on the number of suspensions when the suspension related to the “HA” is exhausted. The variation mode random number delimiter information is configured such that the variation mode group may or may not differ depending on the number of holds when the hold related to the “HA” is exhausted. In addition, in the case of a hold in which the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HB”, it is configured again so that the selection tendency of the variation mode is not different depending on the number of holds when the hold related to “HB” is exhausted. I will supplement.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in a step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the hour/hour counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining hour/hour) is 0. If Yes in step 1574, in step 1576 and step 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then Process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, step 1570, or step 1574, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 has a specific game flag (main game probability change flag/main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in a step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c to zero. Next, in a step 1608, the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, in a step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, at step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1700). Even if No in step 1602, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) indicating that the special game is started in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1702, at step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 is
It is determined that the special game permission has not been given, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800).

Next, in a step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine whether there is. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b with an opening pattern (for example, stop of the main game symbol). If the design is 3A, 3B or 4B, the opening pattern "open for 0.2 seconds → close for 1.0 second → open for 0.2 seconds → close", the stop design of the main game design is 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, the opening pattern “open for 29.0 seconds→closed”) is set. Next, in a step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d (or the second special winning opening electric prize C21d) of the first special winning opening C10 to make the first big prize. The mouth C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is opened, and the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes of steps 1714 to 1720.

Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command relating to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main controller SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in a step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) to the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. ) Determines whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (eg, 29 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening is set. It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. When the result in step 1726 is No, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1800).

Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 determines the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in a step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, at step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, a round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. In the case of Yes at step 1734, at step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) indicating that the special game is ended in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in a step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (a process of step 1800). Even if No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variation game state is set. It is a jackpot pattern to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754 the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, if No in step 1752, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probable variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that does not shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the execution of the special game, in this example, 4A/4B), the step also Move to 1756.

Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a certain change/time saving big hit symbol (probability change after the end of execution of the special game. It is a big hit symbol that shifts to the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage certain change/time-short and big hit symbol (this example). Then, it is determined whether or not it is 5A/3B). In addition, the awakening stage probability change/shorter time jackpot design means the awakening stage after the big hit (a staying stage, and at the end of the stage, a stage that can inform the player whether or not they are in a probability variation game state) It is a jackpot pattern that shifts to. If Yes in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter AMN52 in step 1760. Next, in a step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in a step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the awakening stage shift command (command relating to information to shift to the awakening stage) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and then proceeds to step 1778. Even if No in step 1758, the process proceeds to step 1778.

On the other hand, if No in step 1756 (that is, if the stop symbol is any of 3A, 4A, and 4B in this example), in step 1766, the specific game control means MP50 is the first and second main game symbols. Referring to the information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the stop symbol is a non-probable variation/time saving big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state and a time shortening game state after the execution of the special game, in this example, 4A・4B) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the count value of the hour/hour reduction counter MP52c to the number of hour/hour reductions based on the big hit symbol. If, for example, the stop design 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, in the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1, 20 times, 4A-2 or 4B-2 Is 60 times, etc.) In this way, in this example, among the big hit symbols belonging to the 4A symbol (4B symbol), 4A-1 (4B-1), which has a time saving time of 20, and 4A-2 (60 times, having an hour saving time. 4B-2), and is configured to include, but the type of big hit symbol and the type of time saving number is not limited to this, it is other time saving number (for example, the time saving number is 40 times) 4A-. 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and the number of shortening times in each jackpot pattern illustrated and 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2 in 4A pattern (4B pattern)) The ratio etc.) can be changed appropriately. Next, in a step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c to the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the time saving number set in the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in a step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in a step 1774, the specific game control means MP50 sets a command relating to the awakening stage shift command and the command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. On the other hand, if No in step 1766 {that is, if the stop symbol is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specific game control means MP50 stores the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. By referring to the flag area, it is determined whether or not at least one of the main game probability change flag and the main game time saving flag is on at the time of winning the big hit. If Yes in step 1776, the process moves to step 1778.

Next, in step 1778 and step 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1800 processing).

On the other hand, if No in step 1776 (that is, if the main game probability variation flag and the main game time saving flag are off (normal game state)), in step 1782, the specific game control means MP50 causes the devil stage transition command (devil stage). (Command relating to the information indicating the shift to (4)) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). , And shifts to the next process (process of step 1800). In addition, after the special game related to the "3A" symbol that is won in the normal game state, the probability change game state and the non-time shortening game state are transitioned to, and after the small hit game that is won in the normal game state is finished, the normal game state is It is configured to execute substantially the same effect in any case. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) relating to the hit symbol, that is, the "3A" symbol or the small hit symbol, is executed (a so-called latent state is created), and the fun of the game is enhanced. It will be improved.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1806, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b (in this example, the same first big prize as when executing the special game related to the latent probability variation big hitting symbol). The opening/closing pattern of the mouth C10 is set, for example, 0.2 second open→1.0 second close→0.2 second open→close). Next, in step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first big winning opening C10 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hitting game control means MP40 is a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hitting game is a special probability related to the latent probability varying big hit symbol. Since it is the same as the production mode during the game, it is the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol), is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side (step In the control command transmission processing of 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1812. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the small hit or the latent probability variation big hit is won in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (normal game state), the first big winning opening C10 is opened during the small hit game. By making the mode and the production mode the same as during the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, and by making the stay stage executed after the end of the small hit game and after the special game related to the latent probability variation large hit symbol is also the same, small It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (or the small hit game) related to the big hit pattern of the hit design or the probability of latent change big hit design (or the small hit game) is executed (creates a so-called latent state), and the fun of the game is improved. It will be done.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1811, the process moves to step 1812.

Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s, and determines whether or not there is a winning (winning) in the first big winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10. It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1814, the process moves to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (in this example, 0 2 seconds open→1.0 second close→0.2 second open→1.4 seconds related to closing) is determined. If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1818.

Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first special winning opening electric prize C11d and closes the first special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1823, the small hitting game control means MP40 is a special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hitting game is a special probability related to the latent probability varying big hitting symbol. Since it is the same as the production mode during the game, it is the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol), is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side (step In the control command transmission processing of 1999, the information is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1824.

Next, in a step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability variation flag and the main game shortened flag are off (normal game state). Determine whether. If Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1828, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is a short-time small hitting symbol (in this example, 1K, Long-time small hit pattern (2K), the number of fluctuations that the limited frequency table is referred to after the small hit game is less than} is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1828, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 sets a small number of times in the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 (
(10 times), and the process moves to step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1828, at step 1832, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a long number (30 times), and proceeds to step 1834. Next, step 1
At 834, the small hit game control means MP40 sends a command (command to the sub side) related to the devil stage shift command and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to the sub main control section SM side. It is set in the trust buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (1997 process of step). Even if No in step 1811, step 1816, or step 1824, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1997). In addition, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening opened during the small hitting game is the first big winning opening C10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened during the small hitting game is It may be two big winning openings C20, and in the case of such a configuration, the big winning opening to be opened during the execution of the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example) is also the second big winning opening C20. Is preferred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31, the control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 7D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is set). When received → Initialize sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Reset performance related information at the time of power interruption in sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM indicates that it is a trigger hold (hold held in the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning) from the information related to hold temporarily stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Information is deleted (if there is no hold with information indicating that the trigger is on hold, the process proceeds to the next process without executing this process), and all hold display modes are set to "white". Display (reset the process related to prefetch effect). Note that the process at the time of power failure is not limited to this, and even after the power is restored, the prefetching effect can be continued without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is held and the information related to the hold display mode. You may. In such a configuration, for example, a sub area is provided with an evacuation area that can maintain information even during an electric power failure, and when power failure occurs, the information related to the performance is backed up in the evacuation area and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the information backed up at times. In addition, when the power is restored, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, and when the hold occurs (also regarding the hold other than the newly generated hold), the information about the hold content may be received again from the main side. Good {Although not shown in this example, it is configured such that only information relating to the number of holdings is transmitted (information relating to the content of the holding is not transmitted) from the main side when the power is restored. .. Therefore, the information related to the hold that was present when the power was cut off does not exist after the power is restored, and therefore the prefetch effect cannot be executed for the hold (the main side holds the power when the power is restored. May be configured to be received, and the prefetch effect may be executed for the hold). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative pattern, if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, it will turn dark until the end command of the change is received from the main side. A screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing" etc.) will be displayed}. After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 10B, first, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM causes a pending information management process described later. To execute. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), The repeat processing routine ends.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM determines the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command sent from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing is restored.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to a new suspension occurrence from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main symbol). It is determined whether or not (hold information related to the game symbol) is received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to store the drawing suspension counter (in this example, the maximum four for the first main game, "1" is added to the second main game (up to four). Next, in step 2106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 temporarily stores the command related to the new hold success/failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 outputs suspension information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the suspension generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. If the main side does not transmit the information relating to the hit/fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information, the information is stored in the reserved information temporary storage area in step 2106 or step 2108. Will not be temporarily stored in. Next, in step 2110, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new suspension is on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time prefetching determination process which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2200, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning time prefetching determination process which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

Next, in step 2112, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new suspension has information indicating that the new suspension is trigger suspension. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2112, in step 2250, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch reservation content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, if No in step 2112, the process moves to step 2122.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2114, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2114, in step 2116, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2118, the design suspension information display control means SM22 displays the suspension information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the winning/losing result, the stop symbol information, the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information), the design suspension information. The remaining storage information is shifted while being deleted from the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2120, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2122. Even if No in step 2114, the process proceeds to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 displays on the effect display device SG in the hold display mode determined by making full use of the effect display means SS (in particular, the first hold display section SG12, the second hold On the display unit SG13), the same number of holding display lamps as the drawing holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former read-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2152, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (first main hold) It is determined whether or not there is a hold) that is prioritized over the game side and is consumed. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and there exists a hold having the information indicating that the hold is the trigger hold. Determine whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold held by winning the prize prefetch lottery (first main game prize prefetch lottery, second main game prize prefetch lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a big hit hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2160, the process moves to step 2162.

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery process, first, at step 2162, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. Or not. If Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3) for the new hold. Go to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HA”. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2166, in step 2168, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b to determine whether the new hold variation mode group is Group 3 or not. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery in consideration of the variation mode random number division information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) for the new hold. Go to step 2174. On the other hand, if No in step 2166 (that is, if the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HB”), in step 2172, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is predetermined for the new hold. probability(
In this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning to win 1/3) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2174. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading lottery is easier to win when the stop symbol relating to the first main game is “HB” than when the stop symbol is “HA”.

Next, in step 2174, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for the new hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2112).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152 (when the second main game hold is present in the hold), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2178. Delete the information indicating "Trigger hold" from the stored information related to hold (if there is no hold in the hold that has information indicating that it is trigger hold, do not execute this process and Process) and the next process (process of step 2112). Even if No in step 2154, step 2158, step 2160, or step 2174, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2112). Incidentally, in the processing of step 2178, when there is a hold (occurrence) on the second main game side, in the gaming machine of the second main game side priority digestion like this embodiment, the newly generated second main This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect for a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed because the scheduled fluctuation order is not achieved because the game side holds the hold first. In addition, as a prohibition condition for the prefetch lottery, the prohibition condition is whether or not there is a suspension of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the suspension before the new suspension. Good.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former read-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, at step 2202, the hold pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the current game state is the time-reduced game state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that it is trigger hold in the hold. Determine whether or not there is. If Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and whether or not there is a big jackpot in the hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2206, the process moves to step 2208.

Next, in the latter process of the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2208, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3) for the new hold. Go to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2208, in step 2212, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the new hold variation mode group is the group C or not. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new hold. Go to step 2220. On the other hand, if No in step 2212, the process moves to step 2220.

Next, in step 2220, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for the new hold that has been won in the prize prefetch lottery in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2112). Even if No in step 2202, step 2204, step 2206, or step 2220, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2112).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger suspension is a big jackpot suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger suspension with reference to the suspension display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process (step 2122). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2256, the display mode of trigger hold is determined by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2122).

Here, the two tables in the lower part of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing). In the present embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold mode that can change during execution of the hold change effect by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) are iridescent and red. , Green, and blue, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing) are three of red, green, and blue. A random number will be used for randomization when making a decision. It should be noted that red is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit), while blue is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). The big hit expectation degree for each display mode of the hold when the occurrence occurs is selected only when the iridescent color is a big hit, and the colors other than the iridescent color are in the order of red, green, and blue in descending order of expectation. There is. Note that the display modes that can be changed are merely examples, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased or the colors that can be changed are changed. Further, in the present example, the pending display color is configured to suggest the expectation of a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or in combination with the expectation of a big hit, ), the game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested. In such a case, especially in the probability variation game state, the display color of the hold suggests the degree of expectation of shifting to the probability change game state after execution of the special game when a big hit occurs in the hold. (For example, if the pending display color is red, the probability change probability is high, if the hold display color is blue, the probability change expectation degree is small, etc.), it is possible to determine whether the probability variation game state that is advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to execute a stunning and effective presentation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree may be different depending on the display mode selected from a plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, the pre-reading effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing when the pre-reading lottery is won to the end of variation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). With such a configuration, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice while the prefetch effect is being executed, when the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time The hold display mode that changes with the hold change effect is set to green or red, that is, each time the hold change effect is executed, the hold display mode changes to a high hold expectation display mode (rank up). It is desirable to configure it so that it does not spoil the player's expectations. In addition, the effect related to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the pending display change may be provided. For example, when the fluctuation starts (or when the pending is exhausted), the pending shakes. It is possible to provide an effect mode (so-called gaze pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the design drawing display content deciding means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the drawing display content determining means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n), the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Stop symbol/variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation content, with reference to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol) Is a flat pattern such as "7,7,7", in the case of a lost design, a disparity pattern such as "1,3,5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short time. If it is a change, non-reach, if it is a long time change, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined} and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach production) The related information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2308, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2400). Transition. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the variation start timing of the decorative symbol on the basis of the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the diagram display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has arrived. If Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , And proceeds to step 2426.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2414, at step 2418, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, step 2
At 420, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the figure variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2426. Even if No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board M side main game). It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the awakening stage flag (a flag that is turned on while staying in the awakening stage to be described later) Yes, and it is turned on in step 2614) is turned on. If Yes in step 2428, in step 2430, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c by 1, and proceeds to step 2432. Even if No in step 2428, the process moves to step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and is a devil stage flag (a flag that is turned on during the devil stage stay described later, and step 2634). Is turned on) is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 2432, in step 2434, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 by 1 and then decrements it to step 243.
Go to 6. Even if No in step 2432, the process moves to step 2436.

Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). .. Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). To do. Even if No in step 2410 or step 2426, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 and step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. The big hit start display is performed on the SG (display is appropriately performed based on the type of big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2512. Even if No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2512.

Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG on the basis of the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game performance and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.).

Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect related to the special game being executed, based on the game state at the time of winning of the big hit being executed and the big hit symbols being stopped ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 (for example, in the case of a special game or a small hit game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the game state after the end of the special game is played). A production that cannot be recognized by a person can be performed). Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600). .. Even if No in step 2504 or step 2516, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the awakening stage shift command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "awaking stage" as the stay stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the awakening stage stay counter SM23c to a predetermined number (60 times in this example) in step 2612, and proceeds to step 2614. It should be noted that when the processing of step 2612 is executed, the gaming state on the main side is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.

Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. Even if No in step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. Incidentally, the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by 1 for each change (every stop of the main game symbol). If Yes in step 2616, the process moves to step 2618. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2616, in step 2619, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is won. In the case of Yes in step 2619, in step 2620 the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c to zero, and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, the background effect display control means S
M23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2999). Even if No in step 2619, the process moves to the next process (process of step 2999).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2604, in step 2621 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the devil stage flag is off. If Yes in step 2621, in step 2622, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the devil stage shift command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the “devil stage” as the stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is received from the main side. .. If Yes in step 2626, in step 2628 the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage game state notification value determination table and determines the devil stage game state notification value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a devil stage game state notification value determination table. As shown in the figure, the devil stage game state notification value is configured so that two kinds of values of 10 and 30 can be selected, and 30 is easier to be selected than 10 (the game state is In the probability variation game state, it is easy to select a large value). Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined devil stage game state notification value in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and in step 2634.
Move to. It should be noted that when the process of step 2630 is executed, the main game state is a probability varying game state and a non-time shortening game state.

Next, in step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the devil stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. Even if No in step 2621, the process moves to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. Incidentally, the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 is changed every 1 time (every time the main game symbol is stopped).
Is decremented by 1. If Yes in step 2636, the process moves to step 2638. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2636, in step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is won. If Yes in step 2639, in step 2640 the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 to zero, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the devil stage flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2999 processing). Even if No in step 2639, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2622, in step 2641, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "probability change stage" (the stay stage that allows the player to stay in the probability variation game state) as the stay stage, and the next process (step 2999 processing). On the other hand, if No in step 2641, step 2
At 644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "non-probability change stage" (the stay stage that can stay in the non-stochastic variation game state) as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). To do.

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols related to the first main game are provided, and one lost symbol (in this example, “HA )) is determined, the variation mode may be different depending on the number of holdings at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is configured to be relatively short, and the other lost symbol (book In the example, when “HB”) is determined, the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of holdings at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is configured to be a relatively long time, By configuring the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted to the sub side at the time of the occurrence of the hold, it is possible to change the selection tendency of the variation mode depending on the determined loss pattern, and the variation mode group. With the change mode random number delimiter information, it is possible to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, and the data capacity can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as a prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery (preliminary lottery at the time of winning), there is a second main game hold in the hold, a time reduction game state, and a big hit hold in the hold. (Excluding newly generated hold), there is a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold in the hold, but the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery is not limited to this, for example, The prohibition condition may be a probability variation game state, a predetermined background effect is being executed, a main game hold number is a predetermined number or less, a predetermined reach effect is scheduled to be executed, or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery timing of the look-ahead lottery is the winning timing of the game ball to the main game starting opening (first main game starting opening A10), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main game symbol Fluctuation stop timing (variation stop timing of decorative design), predetermined timing in the middle of fluctuation of the main game symbol (predetermined timing in the middle of fluctuation of decorative symbol), fluctuation start timing of the main game symbol (variation start timing of decorative symbol), And so on.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to a limited frequency, and big hits other than the predetermined big hit (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) is configured not to shift to the limited frequency after the end.

(Second embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, there are two types of lost symbols related to the first main game and one type of lost symbols related to the second main game, but selection of a variation mode based on the type of lost symbols and the determined lost symbols The tendency is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which there is a tendency to select a variation pattern type different from this embodiment or a variation pattern based on the determined loss pattern is referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. To do. The gaming machine according to the second embodiment is not a type of gaming machine in which the probability variation game state continues until the next big hit occurs, but the probability variation game state is a predetermined number of revolutions (for example, a pattern of 80 times). If a big hit does not occur even while continuing), it is a supplementary note that it is a type of gaming machine that shifts to a non-stochastic variation gaming state (so-called ST type gaming machine). Further, during the period in which the probability variation game state continues, the game property is such that a transition from a certain limited frequency state to another limited frequency state occurs. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modified example based on this embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in this embodiment is applicable to the second embodiment.

First, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second) of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first step range (80≧G>50). .. In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1) to determine the main game side random number and the winning/winning lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1474.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1464, in step 1468, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (50≧G>10). Determine whether there is. In the case of Yes in step 1468, in step 1470, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and the main game side random number, the winning/winning lottery result, Based on the number of holding balls on the second main game side, the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1474.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1468, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is within the third stage range (10≧G), at step 1472, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the limited frequency variation. Mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-3
), the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, and the process proceeds to step 1474.

Next, in step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and performs the next process (step 1418). Process). Even if No in step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 33 is an example of the variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 1) referenced in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of lost symbols on the first main game side (in this example, three types of "HA", "HB" and "HC"), and further, There are also a plurality of lost symbols on the second main game side (in this example, three types of "HD", "HE" and "HF") (further, there is a lost symbol on the first main game side). The number is the same as the number of lost symbols on the second main game side). In the second embodiment, the ratio of “HA” (“HD”) is larger than the ratio of “HB” (“HE”) in the lost pattern on the first main game (second main game) side, The ratio of “HB” (“HE”) is higher than that of “HC” (“HF”). Further, in the second embodiment, the selection tendency of the variation mode may be different depending on the lost pattern (details will be described later).

Next, FIGS. 34 to 37 are examples of the variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 2) referred to in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, the limited frequency table (limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta) in the second embodiment is different from the present embodiment in that the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, and the limited frequency table A-2 It is composed of the frequency table A-3 and the limited frequency table B, and if the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state (advantageous state A) after the special game ends, based on the number of times the main game symbol changes. , The limitation frequency table A-1 → the limitation frequency table A-2 → the limitation frequency table A-3 are referred to in this order, and the limitation frequency table is switched. More specifically, the limited frequency table A-1 is a table that can be referred to when the value (for example, G) of the limited frequency counter AMN52c is a value within a predetermined range (80≧G>50). In the limited frequency table A-2, the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50≧G>10).
And the limited frequency table A-3 is a table that can be referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (10≧G). It should be noted that when the limited frequency table A-1 and the limited frequency table A-3 are referred to, the variation mode is determined regardless of the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the limited frequency table A-2 is referred to, The variation mode can be different depending on the number.

Further, as shown in the figure (particularly, FIG. 35), in the present example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “ In the case of “HA”, it is configured such that a variation mode having a short time (variation time of 15 seconds or less in this example) is easily selected (that is, an effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation is easily selected). .. On the other hand, in the non-time shortening game state, if the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is “HA” for a relatively long time (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more). ) Is easily selected (that is, an effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation is easily selected). Furthermore, in the non-time reduction game state, if the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is "HB", a variation mode other than a specific variation mode (in this example, a variation mode in which the variation time is 60 seconds) It is configured to be easily selected.

Here, in the variation mode of the first main game (second main game) side in the non-time-reduced game state (during time-reduced game state), the win/loss lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is "HA"("HD"). ) Is configured so that the variation time can be relatively different depending on the number of holdings when the holding is exhausted, and the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HB” or “HC” (“HE” or “HF”). )), the change time is configured to be relatively unlikely to change depending on the number of holds when the hold is consumed. For example, regarding the first main game symbol fluctuation (second main game symbol fluctuation) in the non-time-reduced game state (time-reduced game state), the win/loss lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is "HA"("HD"). In this case, the variation mode determination table contents to be referred to are switched according to the number of holdings on the first main game side (the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the number of holdings is 2 to 3 The contents of the decision table are changed). Specifically, when the determined symbol is "HA"("HD"), the variation time (and the rendering mode) may differ depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variation {the variation time (and the rendering mode) until the hold is exhausted. If the determined symbol is “HB” or “HC” (“HE” or “HF”), it is configured to be indeterminate. ) Can be determined. Incidentally, the present invention is not limited to this, in the variation mode of the first main game (second main game) side in the non-time-reduced game state (during the time-reduced game state), the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is " Regarding the hold that is "HA" or "HB"("HD" or "HE"), the variation time can be relatively different depending on the number of hold when the hold is exhausted, and the winning/disapproval lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is With respect to the hold that is “HC” (“HF”), the variation time may be relatively unlikely to differ depending on the number of holds when the hold is consumed.

On the other hand, in the variation mode of the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, with regard to the case where the lost symbol is "HB" or "HC", in the normal time, the variation time is a long variation (for example, 60 seconds or more). ), it is easy to select the reach effect, but at the limited frequency (when the limited frequency B flag is on), as shown in the limited frequency table B, the variation time is a long variation (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured that it is difficult to select the reach effect described above.

Further, as shown in the figure, at the time of a loss, the limited frequency table A-3 is relatively easier to select the variable time than the limited frequency table A-2, and the limited frequency table A-3 is selected. In No. 1, it is easier to select a shorter variation time than in the limited frequency table A-3. With this configuration, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it is determined that the gaming state will continue until the next special game win, so a predetermined period {this example Then, from the end of the special game to the end of the 30th change (from the start of the 31st change to the end of the 70th change)}, when the jackpot is not won, the table to be referred to is the limited frequency table A- By changing from 1 to the limited frequency table A-2 (limited frequency table A-2 to limited frequency table A-3), the change time relatively changes, so the time to win the jackpot changes and the game It will reduce the fatigue of the person.

Here, as shown in FIG. 37, with respect to the second main game symbol variation, when the "HF" (and "HE") symbol is determined, the variation time is a relatively long variation in the time reduction game state. While the mode is easily selected, it is configured such that the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short in the non-time shortened gaming state is easily selected.

In the second embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is relatively relative to that in the case of “HA”. It is easy to select a variation mode that is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode for a long time (for example, a variation mode for 120 seconds) is configured to be easily selected.

Further, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is relatively more than when the determination symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is easy to select a variation mode that has a long time (in this example, a variation time of 60 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and the average variation time that is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is configured so that a predetermined variation mode that takes a longer time (for example, a variation mode that takes 120 seconds) can be selected more easily.

Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, if the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is “HA” than Also, it is easy to select a variation mode having a relatively long time (in this example, variation time of 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and the selected variation The average value of time is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode for a long time (for example, a variation mode for 120 seconds) is configured to be easily selected.

Further, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is relatively more than when the determination symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is easy to select a variation mode that has a long time (in this example, variation time is 60 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and the average variation time that is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is configured so that a predetermined variation mode that takes a longer time (for example, a variation mode that takes 120 seconds) can be selected more easily. Here, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpot symbols relating to the second main game symbol variation, and the different jackpot symbols have different advantages for the player (in this example, for example, jackpot symbols are In the case of 3B, 2R short open big hit is relatively less advantageous, and when the big hit symbol is 7B, 16R long open big hit is relatively advantageous. Under such circumstances, further, in the non-time shortening game state, when a specific effect (for example, reach effect or fluctuation in which the fluctuation time becomes a relatively long fluctuation) occurs in the second main game symbol fluctuation. If the specific effect does not result in a jackpot having a high advantage, the jackpot may have a relatively low advantage (or a jackpot having a relatively low advantage may easily occur). (As its premise, in the second main game symbol variation at the time of losing in the non-time shortening game state, regardless of the type of the symbol determined at the time of losing, the specific effect is not executed or is difficult to be executed There is).

In the second embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is relatively relative to that in the case of “HA”. It is easy to select a variation mode that is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the win/loss lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB”, compared to the determination symbol “HA” Is configured such that a predetermined variation mode that takes a long time (for example, a variation mode that 120 seconds) is easily selected.

Further, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is relatively more than when the determination symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is easy to select a variation mode that has a long time (in this example, a variation time of 60 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and the average variation time that is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time shortened gaming state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HC”, the determination symbol is “HA” and “HB”. It is configured such that a predetermined variation mode that takes a longer time (for example, a variation mode that is 120 seconds) can be selected more easily than in the case of “”.

Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time shortening game state, when the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HE”, the determination symbol is more than “HD”. A variation mode with a relatively long time (variation time of 30 seconds or more in this example) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation is easily selected), and the variation time selected Is configured so that the average value of is relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time shortening game state, when the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HE”, the determination symbol is more than “HD”. A predetermined variation mode for a long time (for example, a variation mode for 120 seconds) is configured to be easily selected.

Further, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time shortening game state, when the winning/winning lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HF”, the determination symbol is relatively more than when the determination symbols are “HD” and “HE”. A variation mode having a long time (variation time of 60 seconds or more in this example) is easily selected (that is, an effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation is easily selected), and an average value of the selected variation time Is relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, with respect to the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time shortening game state, if the winning/losing lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HF”, the determination symbol is “HD” and “HE”. It is configured so that a predetermined variation mode that takes a longer time (for example, a variation mode that takes 120 seconds) can be selected more easily.

In addition, in this example, variation relating to the loss of the main game symbol, and in the case of two or three holding balls, the variation time (5 seconds) and the third stage that are most easily selected in the second stage of the three-stage ST In the variation time (20 seconds) that is most easily selected, the third stage has a longer variation time. On the other hand, when the variation related to the jackpot of the main game symbol, and the number of holding balls is two or three, the variation time (60 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three-stage ST and the most selected in the third stage In the easy fluctuation time (20 seconds), the second step has a longer fluctuation time.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1554 (second) to step 1560 (second) and step 1580 (second). First, in step 1554 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1554 (second), in step 1556 (second), the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c by 1. Next, in a step 1558 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1558 (second), in step 1560 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, Move to 1570. Even if No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process proceeds to step 1570. On the other hand, after turning off the auxiliary game shortening flag in step 1578, in step 1580 (second), the specific game control means MP50 causes the specific game end command (command to the sub side, the specific game ends, normal) The command relating to the information indicating that the gaming state has been set) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). ), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1605 (second) and step 1615 (second). That is, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second), the special game control means MP30 clears the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c to zero, and proceeds to step 1606. On the other hand, after turning off the condition device operation flag in step 1614, in step 1615 (second), the special game control means MP30 is a specific game end command (command to the sub side, specific game ends, normal) The command relating to the information indicating that the gaming state has been set) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). ), and then proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 20 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 1755 (second), step 1761 (second), step 1763 (second), step 1779 (second), step 1783-1 (second) and step 1783-2. (Second). That is, after turning on the main game probability variation flag in step 1754, in step 1755 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a certain number (80 times) in the probability variation number counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1756. .. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1756 or Yes in step 1776, in step 1761 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter AMN52c to a predetermined number (80 times), and then proceeds to step 1762.

On the other hand, after turning on the limited frequency A flag in step 1762, in step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 causes the specific game start command (command to the sub side, the specific game starts, and the probability A command relating to the information indicating that the variable gaming state and the time shortened gaming state have been entered) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (sub-main control section by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Sent to the SM side). Next, in a step 1779 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times) in the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to a step 1778.

On the other hand, if No in step 1776, in step 1783-1 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a predetermined number (30 times). Next, in a step 1783.2 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and shifts to the step 1784. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the short open big hit (3A/3B) is won in ST, the certainty variation counter MP51c is reset to a predetermined number (80 times in this example), which is limited. Although the frequency counter value increases from 0, when the small hit is won, the limited frequency counter value is not cleared and the limited frequency counter value before the small hit is taken over. ..

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2161 (second), and the purpose thereof is that all of the holdings before the holding which is the target of the pre-reading lottery are set to a short time varying time. That is, in step 2160, when there is no big hit hold on the first main game side before the new hold, in step 2161 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k is With reference to the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, all the stop symbols of the hold of the first main game side before the new hold are “HA” (the first main game side in which the relatively shortest variation time is easily selected). It is determined whether or not it is a lost pattern). If Yes in step 2161 (second), the process proceeds to step 2162, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2112). In addition, in this example, the hold prefetch lottery can be executed only when the hold on the first main game side before the new hold is all the hold HA. Without limitation, for example, only when the first main game side hold before the new hold is all about the lost HA and is the hold of group 1 (hold corresponding to division 1 or 2) Alternatively, the hold prefetch lottery may be executed.

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2207-1 (second), step 2207-2 (second), step 2223 (second) to step 2230 (second), step 2232 (second) to step 2238. It is (second) and step 2240 (second), and the purpose thereof is to make the execution mode of the prefetch lottery different depending on the stay stage during the specific game (during the time reduction game state). That is, if Yes in step 2206, in step 2207-1 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main before the new hold is executed. It is determined whether or not all the stopped symbols on the game side are “HD” (relatively shortest variation patterns on the second main game side that are easily selected). If Yes in step 2207-1 (second), in step 2207-2 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and is currently set. It is determined whether or not the stay stage is the “long production stage” (the stay stage in which the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-2). If Yes in step 2207-2 (second), the process moves to step 2208. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2207-2 (second), in step 2223 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and is currently set. It is determined whether or not the staying stage is the “fixed production stage” (the staying stage in which the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-3). If Yes in step 2223 (second), in step 2224 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. Or not. If Yes in step 2224 (second), in step 2226 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/4 in this example). , And proceeds to step 2220. On the other hand, if No in step 2224 (second) (that is, if the new hold is a hold that causes a loss), in step 2230 (second), the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k determines the predetermined probability ( In this example, the winning pre-reading lottery for winning 1/6) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2220. In the case of No in step 2223 (second) {that is, when the currently set stay stage is the "short production stage" (stage referring to the limited frequency table A-1)}, the following process The process proceeds to (processing of step 2112). In this example, the hold prefetch lottery can be executed only when the second main game side hold before the new hold is all the hold HD. Not limited, for example, only when all of the second main game side of the hold before the new hold is the hold for the loss HD and the hold of the group A (hold corresponding to the division 1 or 2) Alternatively, the hold prefetch lottery may be executed.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2232 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the number of holdings temporarily stored in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the lottery. The variation stop frequency Ha (0 to 4 times) of the main game symbol until the winning hold (trigger hold) is exhausted is derived. Next, in step 2234 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c-3, and based on the counter value, the main game symbol until the current stay stage ends The number Hb of fluctuation stops is derived. Next, in step 2236 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines that the number of prefetching effects (in this example, Ha) is the minimum number of prefetching effects (for executing effective prefetching effects. It is the minimum number of times, for example, 2 times or more) and is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2236 (second), in step 2238 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k satisfies the relationship of Ha ≤ Hb for the derived Ha and Hb (prefetch effect). Ends during the current stay stage). In the case of Yes in step 2238 (second), in step 2222, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k stores a new hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. The information "Trigger hold" is added and temporarily stored. Next, in step 2240 (second), the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets Ha in the prefetching effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). On the other hand, step 2207-1 (second), step 22
Also in the case of No in 36 (second) or step 2238 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2112).

As described above, in the second embodiment, the prefetch lottery is not executed when the player stays on the “short stage”. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the prefetch lottery may not be executed in the “fixed production stage” and the prefetch lottery may be executed in the “short production stage”. Good.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the “HA” and the “HD” in the suspension related to the loss are configured to be excluded from the prefetch lottery (because it does not become the group 3). ). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and both “HA” and “HD” may be targets of the prefetch lottery. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the prefetch lottery is harder to win than other lost symbols. In the case of the pre-reading lottery related to the first main game, “HC” is more than “HB”, and in the case of the pre-reading lottery related to the second main game, “HF” is more than “HE”, the group 3 is Since the probability of selection is high (there are many random values), it is easy to win the prefetch lottery. In addition, the stop symbols that are held before the trigger is held are all "HA" in the case of the prefetch lottery related to the first main game, and "HD" in the case of the prefetch lottery related to the first main game. Further, the prefetch lottery related to the second main game side is configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when the stay stage is different from the present time when the hold subject to the prefetch lottery is exhausted.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2350 (second). That is, in step 2306, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined and temporarily stored in the design drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and then in step 2350 (second), the design drawing display content determination means SM21n will be described later. The pre-reading execution effect determination process is performed.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prefetching execution effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second) of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the schematic drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the specific game execution flag (the specific game execution flag is turned on in step 2656) Is off). If Yes in step 2352, in step 2364 the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the counter value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is greater than 0. If Yes in step 2364, in step 2366 the packaging display content determination means SM21n subtracts 1 from the counter value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, at step 2368, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b to determine whether or not the stay stage currently set is the "long effect stage". judge. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the drawing display content determination means SM21n causes the look-ahead effect dedicated to the "long production stage" (for example, "At the time of the start of fluctuation, "... in XX times...!" and the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c. Command for displaying the effect of counting down the value of) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2308).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2368, in other words, in the case of executing the prefetching effect in the "fixed effect stage", in step 2372, the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 causes a hit or not when the "fixed effect stage" changes. The content of the effect at the stage is determined as a look-ahead effect (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the jackpot expectation degree) dedicated to the stage, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). Even if No in step 2352 or step 2364, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2308).

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the stay stage prefetching execution effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a specific game start command has been received from the main side (in this example, the main side does not It is determined whether or not the probability change/non-time reduction game state is changed to the probability change/time reduction game state}. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654 the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game execution flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666.

Here, the specific game in-execution flag is a flag indicating that it is in a specific game (for example, a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state, so-called ST) state, and is turned on when the start of the specific game is triggered. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to be turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit value (for example, the upper limit number of ST, 80).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2658 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the specific game end command is received from the main side (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Judgment, or judgment whether the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80 which is the upper limit number of STs)}. If Yes in step 2658, in step 2660 the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero-clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game execution flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666. Even if No in step 2658, the process proceeds to step 2666.

Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol is newly stopped. If Yes in step 2668, in step 2670 the background effect display control means SM23 adds (increments) 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2672. On the other hand, if No in step 2668, the process of step 2670 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2672.

Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. If Yes in step 2672, in step 2674 the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "short effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999). Process).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2672, in step 2676 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. If Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "long effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999). Process).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2676, in step 2680, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. If Yes in step 2680, in step 2682 the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "fixed effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999). Process). Even if No in step 2666 or step 2680 (for example, when the specific game is not in progress), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

(Action)
Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing the prefetching effect during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, a specific game is finished without winning the big hit.

First, under the situation of probability variation game state and time shortening game state, the reserve balls of the first main game side are exhausted, and the reserve balls of the second main game side become four, and then at the timing 1 in the figure. , The fluctuation of the second main game symbol will start. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the short performance stage ends and the long performance stage shifts when the main game symbol changes 30 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger hold that can be a trigger for executing the prefetching effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long effect stage is 40 (Ha≦Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol relating to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long production stage has a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus has a change time of 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the look-ahead effect is ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold is ended.

Next, at timing 7 in the figure, the trigger preserving that can be the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is generated, and thus it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long effect stage is 1 (Ha>Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will not be done. Next, at the timing of 8 in the drawing, the long game stage ends and the process shifts to the fixed game stage when the main game symbol changes 70 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of the trigger hold that can be the trigger for executing the prefetching effect. At this timing, the number Ha of fluctuation stops until the trigger hold is exhausted is 2 and the number Hb of fluctuation stops until the fixed effect stage is 10 is (Ha≦Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the look-ahead effect is ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol relating to the trigger hold is ended. Since the pre-reading effect is the pre-reading effect on the fixed effect stage, the variation time related to the trigger hold is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing 12 in the figure, the fixed performance stage ends and the specific game ends as a result of the main game symbol having changed 80 times after the special game.

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, three types of lost symbols are provided for each of the first main game side and the second main game side, and the probability variation game state and time reduction are provided. In the gaming state, the limited frequency table to be referred to (variation mode determination table) is switched depending on the number of variations after the end of the special game, so that the nature of the lost symbol can be changed depending on the limited frequency table to be referred to. At the same time, it is possible to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed based on the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information, so that the data capacity can be reduced.

(First modification from the second embodiment)
In addition, in the second embodiment, when the prefetching effect straddles the end of the stay stage, the prefetching effect is not executed. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is devised so that the prefetching effect is appropriately executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the production more entertaining. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a modification example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the modification points from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 24 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2242 (second variation 1), step 2244 (second variation 1), step 2246 (second variation 1), and step 2248 (second variation 1). That is, in step 2222, after temporarily storing with addition of information indicating "trigger hold" to the new hold held in the winning pre-reading lottery, in step 2242 (second variation 1), hold pre-reading effect execution The propriety determination means SM26k refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit (as another configuration, the new hold is a big hit). It is also possible to determine whether or not it is a hold that becomes, or whether or not it is a hold that becomes a lose and the lose symbol is “HF”). If Yes in step 2242 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2240 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 2242 (second variation 1) (that is, if the new suspension is a retention that causes a loss), in step 2244 (second variation 1), the hold-ahead read effect execution control means SM26. , Ha≦Hb, in other words, it is determined whether or not the hold won in the prefetch effect lottery is consumed during the current stay stage. If Yes in step 2244 (second variation 1), in step 2246 (second variation 1), the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 sets Ha in the prefetching effect execution counter SM26c, and the next process (in step 2122). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2244 (second variation 1), in step 2248 (second variation 1), the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 sets Hb in the prefetching effect execution counter SM26c, and the next process (step 2112)).

By changing as described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, even if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage, If the pre-reading effect is to be executed over the next stay stage, when the pre-reading effect related to the loss (so-called gasse effect) is executed, The pre-reading effect is configured to end at the final change in the stay stage, and various pre-reading effects are executed to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed even when the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage, on the other hand, the loss occurs. When the prefetch effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage, the prefetch effect is terminated by the final change in the current stay stage. When the pre-reading effect is being executed in the final change, and when the pre-reading effect is continuously executed in the next change, the pre-reading effect is definitely the pre-reading effect related to the big hit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change of the switching of the stay stage, which enhances the entertainment of the game. In the present embodiment, after executing the prefetching effect lottery, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect is determined (and whether or not to interrupt) according to the determination whether to cross the stay stage. However, the order of the processes related to the prefetch effect may be appropriately changed, and for example, the prefetch effect lottery may be performed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed.

In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, when the prefetch effect is executed over the next stay stage, it becomes definite that it becomes a big hit, and when it ends without straddling the next stay stage. However, it is not limited to this, and conversely, if it ends without straddling the next stay stage, it will be a big hit. Even if the look-ahead effect straddles the next stay stage or does not straddle it, it is possible to win both the big hit and the loss, even if the expectation to be a big hit is different. Good (for example, when the look-ahead effect is executed across the stay stages, the change related to the look-ahead is more likely to be a big hit than the possibility of being lost). Further, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit ends with the final change in the current stay stage, the big hit is definite due to the change related to the hold (trigger hold) when the big hit occurs. It may be configured to perform an effect (for example, generation of a notification sound for confirming a big hit, dropping of a winning character for a big hit, etc.).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, each stay stage is always switched in the same pattern during a specific game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by providing a plurality of effect switching patterns during the specific game, It is possible to further enhance the interest. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 23 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2525 (second variation 2) and step 2650 (second variation 2). That is, in step 2514, after setting the command for displaying the effect relating to the special game being executed, based on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit being executed and the jackpot pattern being stopped, step 2525 (second variation 2) ), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the big hit is the first big hit (a big hit in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2525 (second variation 2), in step 2650 (second variation 2), the background effect display control means SM23 performs effect mode determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2516. On the other hand, if No in step 2525 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2516.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second variation 2) of FIG. 48 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode selection round (the first R in this example). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to image display prompting the effect mode selection (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the sub input button input detection device SBs and determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed. If Yes in step 2656, in step 2658 the background effect display control means SM23 switches the effect mode that has been set (for example, battle mode→flight mode, escape mode→battle mode), and proceeds to step 2660. Even if No in step 2652 or step 2656, the process proceeds to step 2660.

Here, in the present example, the "battle mode" is set at the start of the production mode selection round, and if the power interruption occurs after the production mode is determined, the "battle mode" which is the default production mode after the power interruption is restored. Mode" is configured to be reset.

Next, in step 2660, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode determination round (the second R in this example). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2660, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect mode set at the end of the effect mode selection round (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub It is transmitted to the control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2516). Even if No in step 2660, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2516).

By changing as described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided on a certain stay stage, and which effect content table is referred to during the special game to determine the effect mode. By configuring so that the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to do, it is possible to increase the number of effect variations during the specific game, and it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of the player. It will be more interesting.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced game state and the number of fluctuations in the probability variation game state are always the same after the end of the special game, but the present invention is not limited to this. , It is possible to create a new game property by making the number of times of change in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game different from the number of times of change in the probability variation game state. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as Modification 3 of the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. In addition, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, it is configured so as not to have the limited frequency B time (a mode in which the limited frequency is the limited frequency B time), and the second embodiment is a big hit symbol. It is configured so that the contents (game state to be transferred after the end of the big hit) are different.

First, FIG. 50 relates to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 9 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol). It is a flowchart of (display processing). The changes from the second embodiment are step 1413 (second variation 3), step 1415 (second variation 3), step 1450 (second variation 3), step 1417 (second variation 3) and step 1850 (second variation). 2 change 3). That is, in step 1410, after determining the stop symbol for the main game symbol based on the main game symbol hit/miss lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number), step 1413 (second variation 3). ), the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c is 0. If Yes in step 1413 (second variation 3), in step 1415 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the specific game type flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. (Long specific game flag, similar short specific game flag, short specific game flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1413 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes the limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later in step 1450 (second variation 3). Next, in step 1417 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1418.

If the stopped symbol is the big hit symbol in step 1436, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes the limited frequency type determination process described later in step 1850 (second variation 3), and proceeds to step 1438. To do.

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 3) of FIG. 50 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1478, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b and determines whether or not the long specific game flag is ON. If Yes in step 1478, in step 1479, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the first stage range (80≧G>50 in this example). It is determined whether it is a value. In the case of Yes in step 1479, in step 1480, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to determine the main game side random number and the winning/winning lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1479, in step 1482, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and the counter value G is within the second stage range (in this example, 50≧G>10). ) Value is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1482, in step 1483, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to determine the main game side random number, the winning/winning lottery result, Based on the number of reserved balls on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1482, in step 1484, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to determine the main game side random number Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)}. Incidentally, the processing of the steps 1478 to 1484 is processing for determining the variation mode relating to the long specific game.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1478, at step 1486, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1486, in step 1487, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 stores the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Referring to the main game table 3, based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, determine the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol and move to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)} To do. In addition, the processing of the step 1486 and the step 1487 is processing for determining a variation mode relating to the short specific game.

In addition, in the case of No in step 1486, in other words, when the similar short specific game flag is on, in step 1488, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is It is determined whether or not the value is within the range of one step (80≧G>50 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1488, in step 1489, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is within the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Referring to the main game table 3, based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, determine the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol and move to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)} To do.

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1488, at step 1490, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (in this example, 50≧G>10). ) Value is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1490, in step 1492, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to determine the main game side random number, the winning/winning lottery result, Based on the number of reserved balls on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1490, in step 1494, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to determine the main game side random number Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1417 (second variation 3)}. Incidentally, the processing of the steps 1488 to 1494 is processing of determining the variation mode related to the similar short specific game.

Here, the limited frequency table reference table in the lower part of the figure is a table summarizing the limited frequency table to be referred to for each limited frequency counter value in each specific game. As shown in the figure, when the long specific game flag is turned on, the table to be referred to is switched in the order of the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, and the limited frequency table A-3. When the specific game flag is turned on, the table to be referred to is switched in the order of the main game table 3 → the limited frequency table A-2 → the limited frequency table A-3, and when the short specific game flag is turned on, it is referred to. The table is only the main game table. In addition, when the similar short specific game flag is turned on and when the short specific game flag is turned on, the limited frequency table to be referred to first is the same, so which specific game is the player (specific game? Is difficult to determine).

In this way, when the short specific game flag is on (after the big hit related to 3A is over), the main game table 3 is referred to without referring to the limited frequency table A-1. If the long specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table A-2 is referred to after the time shortening game is over (after 30 fluctuations), whereas the short specific game flag is on The main game table 3 is referred to. Even after the big hit for 3A, if the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency table A-1 is referred to after the big hit ends. ..

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the limited frequency type determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second variation 3) of FIG. 50 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the probability varying gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1852, in step 1856, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 sets the limited frequency counter AMN52c to a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times). Next, in step 1858, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns on the long specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1438). ..

On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in other words, if the big hit symbol is a big hit in the normal gaming state (first hit), in step 1854, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 causes the big hit in the stopped state. It is determined whether or not the design is a long specific game design (7A, 7B, 5B, 3B in this example). If Yes in step 1854, the process moves to step 1856.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1854, in step 1860, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol in stop is a similar short specific game symbol (5A in this example). .. If Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 sets the limited frequency counter AMN52c to a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times). Next, in step 1864, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns on the similar short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1438). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1860, in other words, when the big hit symbol in stop is the short specific symbol (3A in this example), in step 1866, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the limited frequency counter AMN52c. A predetermined number of times B (for example, the case of 30 times is illustrated, but the number is not limited to this. It is preferable that the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times A). Next, in step 1868, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 turns on the short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1438). ..

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 20 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1755 (second variation 3), step 1784 (second variation 3), and step 1786 (second variation 3). That is, after turning on the main game probability variation flag in step 1754, in step 1755 (second variation 3) and step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a certain number of times in the probability variation number counter MP51c (in this example). , 80 times) and a specific game start command (command to the sub side) is set. Next, in a step 1784 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is off. If Yes in step 1784 (second variation 3), the process moves to step 1779 (second), and the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time saving number counter MP52c. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1784 (second variation 3) (in the case of a short specific game (that is, the big hit symbol is 3A)), in step 1786 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50. Sets a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1778.

Thus, in the third modification from the second embodiment, when the short specific game flag is on (after the big hit related to 3A is over), the probability variation counter MP51c is set to 80 times, and the time saving is performed. Since the number of times counter MP52c is set to 30 times, it is configured such that the number of probabilistic changes and the number of shortening times are different.

By changing as described above, according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the period (the number of fluctuations) that is the time-reducing game state after the special game is changed depending on the big hit symbol, and the time-reducing game state is also set. By referring to the same variation mode determination table when a certain period is short and when it is long, even if the number of variations that results in a time-reduced game state is different, the same variation mode (and effect contents) ( And effects) are executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how long the running time-reduced gaming state continues, and the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by executing the effects that fuel the expectation of the player. Becomes

Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a similar short specific game, the variation mode and/or the variation mode not selected in the case of a short specific game are the same. May have different effect contents. In such a case, when the symbol variation (or effect) is executed in the variation mode selected only in the similar short specific game, the period of the time shortening game state is relatively long. The person can recognize it (conversely, it may have a variation mode/effect content selected only in the short specific game).

(Modification 4 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, after the special game is over, the probability variation game state with a limited number of times is always entered, and the entertainment in the probability variation game state is switched step by step to entertain the interest of the game. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, it is not possible to fuel the player's expectation in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state depending on the big hit symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem will be referred to as Modification 4 of the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 5 in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1711 (second variation 4) and step 1900 (second variation 4), the purpose of which is the sorting game (the second special winning opening C20 having a specific area). It is configured to be able to execute a unit game of opening). That is, in step 1711 (second variation 4), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently executed round is the distribution game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). If Yes in step 1711 (second variation 4), in step 1900 (second variation 4), the distribution game execution control means MP36 executes the distribution game execution processing described later, and proceeds to step 1734. On the other hand, if No in step 1711 (second variation 4), the process moves to step 1712, and the same processing as in the present embodiment is executed. In addition, although not particularly shown in this example, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 4 of the second embodiment, since the rounds for executing the sorting game are the second R and the fourth R, in the case of a big hit with any of the symbols Even so, the minimum number of rounds in the special game is set to four so that any of the distribution game execution rounds (second and fourth R) can be executed (there is a distribution game that is not executed. It is preferable to configure such that a special game with such a round number is not set).

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 (second variation 4) of FIG. 54 in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment. First, in step 1902, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1902, the process moves to step 1916. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1904, the sorting game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (5A/5B. 7A and 7B) is determined. If Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the sorting game execution control means MP36 sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). Then, an opening pattern designed so that the entrance into the specific area C22 is definite is set, and the process proceeds to step 1910. On the other hand, if No at step 1904 (that is, if the stopped main game symbol is 3A/3B), at step 1908, the sorting game execution control means MP36 has the second area having the specific area C22. As an opening pattern of the winning opening C20, a short opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern designed to be open for 0.1 seconds and non-entering the specific area C22 is definite) Is set and the process proceeds to step 1910.

Next, in step 1910, the sorting game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1912, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1914, the sorting game execution control means MP36 opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1916.

Next, in step 1916, the sorting game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1916, the process moves to step 1920. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1916, in step 1918, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1918, the process proceeds to step 1920. Next, in step 1920, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1922, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1924, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1924, in step 1926, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1928. .. Also in the case of No in step 1924, the process moves to step 1928. Next, in step 1928, the distribution game execution control means MP36 increments the round number counter by 1 (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1734). Even if No in step 1918, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1734).

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 20 in the modified example 4 of the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1788 (second variation 4), step 1789 (second variation 4), step 1790 (second variation 4), and step 1792 (second variation 4). The purpose is, in the sorting game executed in the second embodiment, depending on whether or not there is a ball into the specific area C22, if the upper limit value of the number of fluctuations in the probability variation game state and the number of fluctuations in the time shortening game state are different. It is to let. That is, in step 1788 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation transition reservation flag is on. .. In the case of Yes in step 1788 (second variation 4), in step 1789 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 causes the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1754. On the other hand, in step 1763 (second), after setting the specific game start command (command to the sub side), in step 1790 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MN52c a predetermined number of times. (80 times in this example) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1778.

On the other hand, if No in step 1788 (second variation 4), in step 1792 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times, (Not limited to this), and the process proceeds to step 1778. Thus, in the modified example 4 from the second embodiment, when the game ball is not detected in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, the limited frequency A flag is not turned on and the limited frequency state is set. It is configured such that the time saving frequency is different from the case where the game ball is not detected, and the probability variation game state is not changed, and the game ball is detected in the specific area C22. Further, the different number of shortening times (“80-50=30 times”) has the same value as the number of fluctuations (30 times) staying in the first stage.

As described above, according to the modification example 4 from the second embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after execution of the special game depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the special game. In the game machine (so-called Tamakoshi-type gaming machine) that determines (it shifts to the probability variation game state when there is a ball in a specific area and does not shift to the probability variation game state when there is no ball), if it is in the probability variation game state According to the profit mode of the player, by making the variation mode (and production) in the non-probability variation game state and the time shortening game state when there is no difference from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, It is possible to execute an appropriate performance. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the sorting game, a special effect (an effect for inspiring whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is opened for a long time, entering a specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect that fuels whether or not a ball is made, an effect that notifies that a ball has been entered into the specific area C22, and the like (the execution mode is not particularly limited, but, for example, In the case of an effect for notifying that the specific area C22 has been entered, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG of the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG are set at the timing (preferably immediately after) the entry of the ball. It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the notification is executed by an effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable object accessory or light guide plate for effect) (for example, on the effect display device SG. An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable object for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or by irradiating light to the light guide plate, an image is formed on the light guide plate. Make it stand out, etc.)}.

Further, in the modified example 4 from the second embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes in the unit game (round) in which the second special winning opening is in the open state (for example, two types). Although not specifically shown, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or equal to one firing interval of a game ball) and a predetermined time after the first time is opened A second unit game that can be opened (or opened/closed) again for a second time longer than the first time after closing the time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the completion of the opening operation for the first time when the degree of expectation for probability fluctuation transition is low, It is possible to provide the possibility that the opening operation for the second time, which has a high degree of expectation for the transition to fluctuations, will be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time period is equal to or longer than one firing interval of the game ball or more than (one half of the upper limit prize-winning number of the round)×(game) in order to guarantee entry into the specific area. It is more preferable that it is equal to or more than one shot interval of the sphere, or more than (upper limit winning number of the round)×(one shot interval of the game sphere) or more.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment to the modification example 4 from the second embodiment, the limited frequency table of three stages (“first stage→second stage→third stage”) at the limited frequency A. Can be referred to, and as a modified example of the execution mode of the prefetch effect (or prefetch lottery) in such a configuration, (1) there is a dedicated prefetch effect at each stage, (2 ) There is a common prefetching effect in a plurality of stages, (3) the occurrence frequency of the prefetching effect decreases in any of the stages compared to other stages, (4) one or a plurality of stages (for example, two stages) The pre-reading lottery may be executed in the eye), but the pre-reading lottery is not executed in other stages (for example, the first stage and the third stage). In addition, depending on the stop design (determined stop design) related to the hold that is the target of the pre-reading lottery, the execution mode of the pre-reading production (or the pre-reading lottery) may be configured to be different, and the pre-reading production in such a configuration (Or, as the execution mode of the prefetch lottery), the execution mode of the prefetch effect (or the prefetch lottery) of (1) to (3) described above is performed only when (A) the stop symbol is “HF”. B) The prefetch lottery can be executed only when the stop symbol is "HF", (C) When the stop symbol is "HF", the probability is higher than when the stop symbol is "HD" or "HE". The pre-reading lottery is executed in (or it is easy to win the pre-reading lottery).

Further, the effect that occurs at any stage may be configured to occur even when the limited frequency state is not reached.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment to the modification example 4 from the second embodiment, in the case of switching from the staying stage that is staying to the next performance stage, in the final variation of the staying stage that is staying. It may be configured such that a special effect (effect that suggests that the stage is switched) can be executed when the stay stage is switched. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable to refer to a dedicated table (stage switching table) at the time of a change in executing the effect, and to ensure a changing time for executing the effect. Further, in the final variation of the stay stage, it may be configured such that a dedicated variation mode is selected only at the time of losing, and the normal hit effect in the relevant stay stage is executed at the time of hitting. Thus, for a player who sees the effect for the first time, it is easy to understand the change of the effect, and for a player who is familiar with the effect, the result of the final change in which the stay stage is changed can predict the winning/failing result. It will be more interesting. In addition, by utilizing the fact that the final variation of the stay stage is a dedicated variation pattern, even when a big hit occurs in the final variation of the stay stage, substantially the same production as the stage switching production is executed, and after the production ( Alternatively, it may be configured such that a big hit effect can be executed (on the way).

(Third Embodiment)
In this embodiment, the production is executed during the variation time of the main game symbol determined by referring to the variation mode determination lottery table, but the period in which the production can be executed is not limited to this. .. Therefore, the configuration capable of performing the effect other than during the variation time of the main game symbol determined by referring to the variation mode determination lottery table is the third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. I will describe.

First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1930 (third), step 1950 (third) and step 1443 (third) to step 1447 (third), and the purpose thereof is so-called variable fixed time (main game). Although the symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, it is a period during which a new symbol fluctuation is not started during the period, and a time for making it easy to recognize the type of the main game symbol that is definitely stopped and displayed) Is to be provided. In addition, in the third embodiment, as a variation start condition of the main game symbol, a condition "not in variation fixed time" is added.

First, after executing the processing of step 1450, step 1500 or step 1416, in step 1930 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute the variable additional information control processing described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a variable fixed time determination process described later, and step 141
Go to 8. In this way, in this example, when the fluctuation start condition related to the fluctuation of the main game symbol is satisfied, the fluctuation fixed time related to the fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, after the changing flag is turned off in step 1434, in step 1444 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C changes in step 1950 (third). The fixed time is set in the variable fixed time timer MP12t and the timer is started. Next, in step 1445 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are fixed during fluctuation in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1446 (third).

On the other hand, if No in step 1426, in step 1443 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are flag areas of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation fixing flag is ON. If Yes in step 1443 (third), the process proceeds to step 1446 (third), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, in step 1446 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C,
The variable fixed time timer MP12t is referred to and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1446 (third), in step 1447 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The variation fixed flag in the flag area is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1436. If No in step 1446 (third), the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the variable addition time control process according to the subroutine of step 1930 (third) of FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1931, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB
By referring to the flag area of 30b, it is determined whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1931, in step 1932, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB1.
With reference to 1b-C, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the variation is an additional jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol to which variation addition time can be added, 3A, 4A, 5A in this example). If Yes in step 1932, the process moves to step 1938.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1933, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the fluctuation It is determined whether the stop symbol is a small hit symbol (1K/2K in this example). If Yes in step 1933, the process proceeds to step 1938, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1931, in step 1934, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag is on and It is determined whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1934, in step 1935, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation. Determines whether or not the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example). If Yes in step 1935, the process moves to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1935, in step 1936, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are the first and second
By referring to the main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the variation is a small hit symbol (1K/2K in this example). If Yes in step 1936, the process moves to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1936, the process moves to the next process {process of step 1950 (third)} (the fluctuation addition time is not added even when the stop symbol of the fluctuation is 4A or 5A).

Next, in step 1938, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, in the variation time of the variation determined in step 1450 or step 1416, variation addition time (when a predetermined condition is satisfied, , 20 seconds) in the present example. Next, in step 1940, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-
C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation is a predetermined big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that can be transferred to the awakening stage, in this example, 4A. 5A) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1940, in step 1942, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the awakening stage transition notification production execution command (the awakening which is the production that informs the player of the transition to the awakening stage) Command for executing the stage transition notification effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1940, that is, in the case where the stop symbol of the fluctuation is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example) or the small hit symbol (1K/2K), in step 1944, the first and second main The game symbol control means MP11-C sets a devil stage transition notification effect execution command (a command for executing the devil stage transition notification effect, which is an effect for informing the player that the devil stage will be transferred) (step 2999). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}.

In this example, in step 1944, the devil stage transition notification effect is executed when the stop symbol of the fluctuation is “3A”, but in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, When the stop symbol of the fluctuation becomes "3A", after the special game related to the "3A" is finished, the probability change game state and the time shortening game state are entered, so that the "probability change stage" is entered. You may comprise so that the production|generation which notifies may be performed. Moreover, even if the stop symbol of the fluctuation becomes "3A" in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, after the special game related to the "3A" ends, the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened. It may be configured to shift to a gaming state. Further, it may be configured to shift to the non-time shortened gaming state after the special game related to the "4A" and "5A" symbols is finished.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) of FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the fluctuation is related to the first main game side. It is determined whether there is fluctuation. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1956, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation. Determines whether or not it is "HB". In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to the first long time (the long time among the fluctuations related to the first main game). The variable fixed time is 1.1 sec in this example, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1956, in step 1960, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to the first short time (short of the fluctuations related to the first main game). The time is a fixed fixed time, which is 0.8 seconds in this example, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the variation fixed time of the variation to the second time (
It is a variable fixed time relating to the second main game, and in this example, it is determined to be 0.5 second), and the process shifts to the next process (process of step 1418).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the variable fixed time performance execution. As shown in the figure, in this example, the effect that can be executed during the variable fixed time is configured to be executable only when the variable fixed time can be secured for the time value of the first long time (1.1 seconds). (Because the production for 1.1 seconds is executed). Therefore, the production during the variable fixed time is executed only when the variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the variable fixed time is the first short time (0.8 seconds) or the second time ( If it is 0.5 seconds), the effect is not executed after the fluctuation stop timing of the decorative pattern in the fluctuation (the effect is not executed during the fluctuation fixed time). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effects having different execution times to be executed during the fixed fluctuation time may be provided, and whether or not to execute the plurality of effects may be determined based on the determined fixed fluctuation time.

In this example, there are two types of fixed fixed time related to the first main game side, "1.1 seconds" and "0.8 seconds", and fixed fixed time related to the second main game side. Is provided for one type of "0.5 seconds", and the variable fixed time related to the second main game side is the shortest. Further, in this example, the time value from the start of the change to the start of the next change, which is the sum of the variable time and the variable fixed time that can be determined, is the time value of the first main game side and the time value of the second main game side. It is configured so that it cannot be the same as the value. Further, although not shown, the two fluctuations are configured so that if the fluctuation fixed times are different, the fluctuation mode and the effect mode are different. Further, only when the stop symbol of the fluctuation is "HB", the fluctuation fixed time on the first main game side is configured to be the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the fluctuation time in that case is It is configured to easily become a long time (when the main game short time flag is off, only a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is selected) (since it can be selected only in the case of HB), the fluctuation time is long. When it becomes, the background effect is “normal background→reach background→normal background”, and the effect for shifting from the reach background to the normal background is executed in the variable fixed time (1.1 seconds). .. Further, when the variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the normal background than when it is the first short time (0.8 seconds). However, it may be configured to be relatively short. For example, (1) when the variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the reach background. Although it is the time that is, in the subsequent normal background, while it is a fixed fixed time, in the case of the first short time (0.8 seconds), there is a time when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the normal background. , (2) If the variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the decorative pattern in the normal background after the reach background is temporarily stopped for 0.1 second, In the case of 1 short time (0.8 seconds), the time during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the normal background is 0.4 second. (3) The variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 Second), the time when the decorative pattern in the normal background after the reach background is temporarily stopped, and the normal background after the reach background when the variable fixed time is the first short time (0.8 seconds) The decorative pattern may be configured to be temporarily stopped at the same time.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2700 (third). That is, after determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol in step 2306, in step 2700 (third), the packaging display content determining means SM21n executes the effect content determination process during additional time, which will be described later, Move to 2308.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process during additional time according to the subroutine of step 2700 (third) of FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an awakening stage transition notification effect execution command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes during the additional time effect {added variation additional time (in this example, the latter half of the variation-related time is 20 seconds). As an effect to be performed}, an awakening stage transition notification effect (an effect to notify that the user is going to the awakening stage) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and The processing shifts to the processing (processing of step 2308). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2702, in step 2706, the packaging display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the devil stage transition notification effect execution command is received from the main side. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes during the additional time effect {added variation addition time (in this example, the latter half of the variation time is 20 seconds). Devil stage transition notification effect (effect for notifying that the devil stage will be moved) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) as The processing shifts to the processing (processing of step 2308). Even if No in step 2706, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2308).

Here, the lower part of the figure is a transition stage notification effect image diagram. In the figure, the fluctuation is determined to be 60 seconds, and then 20 seconds is added as the fluctuation addition time. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol variation starts, and after 60 seconds, the button challenge symbol (“world” symbol) is stopped in the middle row as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Immediately after that, an effect that prompts the sub input button SB to be pressed is displayed (in this example, a continuous hit effect), and either the awakening stage transition notification effect or the devil stage transition notification effect based on the big hit design (or the small hit design). To execute. It should be noted that after the execution of the awakening stage transition notification effect, it shifts to the awakening stage, after the execution of the devil stage transition notification effect, it shifts to the devil stage, and after the end of the stay stage, it is configured to notify the current game state. Further, the more the number of fluctuations staying in the awakening stage and the devil stage is, the higher the probability of being in the stochastic fluctuation gaming state is (the lower the possibility of being in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state is). .. In addition, in a configuration in which the variation addition time is not provided, as an effect mode when performing an effect for shifting to the awakening stage or the devil stage, (1) during a change, chance eyes (for example, even number of 246 etc. Special decorative pattern stop pattern combination) stops, (2) After the decorative pattern is stopped, the screen cracking effect (the background effect and the display of the decorative pattern cannot be seen with the effect such as the glass breaking), The effect mode is, for example, the effect of shifting to the awakening stage or the devil stage) and (3) not performing the button repeated hit effect.

With the above-mentioned configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation addition time can be added after the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and the time value is set under a predetermined condition. By providing a plurality of variable fixed times that can be different and providing an effect dedicated to the variable addition time and the variable fixed time, the fun of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured such that the variable fixed time may be different depending on whether or not it is the variation related to the first main game side and the type of the stop symbol related to the loss, but the variable fixed time is determined. The conditions are not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the modifications from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third variation 1) of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1964, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b to determine whether or not the main game time saving flag is on. .. If Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the second main game hold It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes the group C. If Yes in step 1966, in step 1967, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a fixed time change lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, in step 1968, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C
Refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1968, in step 1970, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a specific time (3 seconds in this example), and the next processing. The process proceeds to (processing of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1966 or step 1968, in step 1971, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a short time (0.5 seconds in this example). ) Is determined and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418).

On the other hand, if No in step 1964, in step 1972, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the first main It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes the group 3 in the game hold. If Yes in step 1972, in step 1973, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a fixed time change lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5) (
Compared to the non-time-reduced game state, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time is relatively short, so the variation fixed time is long. It is higher in the non-time shortened gaming state). Next, in step 1974, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the lottery result, and determine whether or not the lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1974, in step 1976, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a specific time (in this example,
3 seconds) and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1972 or step 1974, in step 1978, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a non-hour short time (in this example, 0.8 Seconds)
Then, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418).

In this way, in this example, the variation fixed time is configured to be different depending on the game state, and the specific variation fixed time (specific time, in this example, 3 seconds) also has different selection probabilities depending on the gaming state. It is configured. In addition, when the fixed time change lottery is won, all the variable fixed time before the change related to the suspension that triggered the execution of the lottery is set to the specific time (in this example, 3 seconds) (or high probability). It may be configured as a specific time). In addition, when the fixed time change lottery is won, the variable fixed time before the change related to the suspension that triggered the execution of the lottery may be all short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) (or high. Probably short time). With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the time until the fluctuation start related to the suspension that triggered the execution of the lottery.

Although not shown in the figure, the effects executed during the fixed fixed time period of the specific time include a movie effect (an effect of displaying a moving image) and a freeze effect (a suddenly darkened image is displayed on the effect display device SG). It is desirable to execute an effect, such as an effect, in which the player has an expectation that there is an on-hold that is a big hit in the on-hold.

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the specific variation mode group is determined, the variation fixed time can be set as the specific time, so that the player can change the variation. By recognizing that the fixed time is a specific time, it is possible to have an expectation that there is a hold with a high jackpot expectation in the hold, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in this example, the variation time is divided into two blocks, that is, an A block which is a period before the reach variation and a B block which is a period after the reach variation, and is determined. The variation addition time and/or the variation fixed time may be added to form one variation.

Further, in this example, the variation fixed time is set to a long time (a time that is approximately the same as the variation time for reaching, for example, 30 seconds), and the reach effect can be executed during the variation fixed time. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the variation time <variation fixed time, the reach effect is executed in the variation time, and the pseudo reach effect is executed in the variation fixed time. For example, the variable fixed time is set to 90 seconds, the variable time is set to 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative pattern related to the variable time is set to "123" which is the special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance) ("4○4"). , Such that the left column and the right column are the same stop symbol, and the stop symbol in the middle column may be a special symbol), and in order to fuel whether the variation is a big hit or a loss at a fixed time thereafter. The stirrer effect is executed, and thereafter, the effect such that the decorative symbol stop symbol becomes “444” is executed.

Further, in the present example, the larger the number of holdings, the shorter the fluctuation fixed time may be selected as the fluctuation fixed time.

In addition, in the present example, when the hold occurs, it is configured to be able to transmit the win/fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information, which are related to the suspension, to the sub side. Even when the game state is different between the time and the time when the generated hold is exhausted, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning/rejection result and the variation mode group are the same (whether or not they are different). Therefore, even if the game result is different between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold that has occurred when the hit result and the variation mode group are the same, even if the prefetch effect is executed across the game state. Or, depending on the type of pre-reading effect to be executed, there may be a case where the pre-reading effect is executed across the game state and a case where it is not executed.

Further, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and a pre-reading effect whose execution is different depending on the change mode of the trigger hold and a pre-reading effect executable regardless of the change mode of the trigger hold may be provided. Further, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be configured to occur simultaneously, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be started at the same time when the pre-reading effect is started, or another pre-reading effect is started during the execution of one pre-reading effect. It may be configured to be performed. Also, the timing of pre-reading effect rank-up (for example, the expectation level for a big hit such as a change in the hold display color from "blue to red" may be increased) may be performed at the same time, or the pre-reading effect may be ranked at different timings. It may be configured to be up. In addition, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, for example, pre-reading effects in which the hold display mode changes, a chance eye pre-reading effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree with a stop appearance (combination of stop designs) of a decorative pattern, a background A change look-ahead effect, a countdown notice look-ahead effect, etc. may be provided. Further, the plurality of look-ahead effects are types or combinations of look-ahead effects that can occur at the same time, the degree of rank up when any of them occurs (1 step UP, 2 steps UP, no UP), and the display mode that appears first. It may be configured such that the jackpot expectation, etc. may differ depending on the design, etc. scheduled to be stopped related to the hold that triggered the prefetch lottery. For example, when the prefetch effect related to “HC” is performed, the prefetch related to “HB” is performed. There may be more types or combinations of look-ahead effects that can occur at the same time than when performing effects, a high degree of rank-up when any of these effects occur, a display mode with a high jackpot expectation level may appear first, etc. ..

In this example, the prefetch lottery is not executed when the trigger hold is present in the hold, but the condition for not performing the prefetch lottery is not limited to this. It may be configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when there is a hold that is a change (a change in the main game symbol that causes the reach effect).

As a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present example, during one change of the main game symbol, the main display after repeating "temporary stop display of left/middle/right symbol → re-variation (so-called pseudo-variation)" By stopping the game symbol, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous variation which is a staging method that shows the player as if the main game symbol has changed multiple times during one variation of the main game symbol. You may. Further, when configured in such a manner, during the execution of the prefetching effect, the pseudo continuous change is not executed as the changing effect related to the hold that is digested before the trigger hold, but the changing effect related to the trigger hold is performed. It may be configured to be able to perform pseudo continuous variation.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiment is added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these concepts listed. May be.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (1),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content determination) that performs a win/fail determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the win/fail determination result. Means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
A second game content determination means (e.g., game content determination) that performs a win/fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the win/no judgment result. Means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
Stop of the first identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the first random number is non-winning The number of types related to the display mode is the stop of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the second random number is non-win More than the number of types related to display mode,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A In the pachinko gaming machine, the variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (2),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
Stop of the first identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the first random number is non-winning The number of types related to the display mode is the stop of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the second random number is non-win More than the number of types related to display mode,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold According to the number of the first pending remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding, while the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may be different,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Is configured such that the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is uniform regardless of the number of the first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding is satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (3),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize mouth which can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first big winning mouth C10, a second big winning mouth C
20),
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
Stop of the first identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the first random number is non-winning The number of types related to the display mode is the stop of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the second random number is non-win More than the number of types related to display mode,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold According to the number of the first pending remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding, while the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may be different,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Regardless of the number of first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is configured to be uniform,
As a game state that depends at least when determining the variation display mode of the first identification information, a normal variation state and a specific variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different compared to the normal variation state Have,
In the normal fluctuation state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, While the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may differ depending on the number of the first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied. Then, in the normal variation state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B Irrespective of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information becomes uniform. ,
In the specific variation state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, While the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information becomes uniform regardless of the number of the first hold remaining. Then, in the specific variation state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B Irrespective of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is uniform. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (4),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
Stop of the first identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the first random number is non-winning The number of types related to the display mode is the stop of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success based on the second random number is non-win More than the number of types related to display mode,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold According to the number of the first pending remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding, while the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may be different,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Regardless of the number of first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is configured to be uniform,
After the occurrence of a certain first hold, before satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold, a game of holding prefetch information indicating the existence of the certain first hold to the player is played. Can be suggested or notified to the person in advance,
Variable display of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied As a group according to the aspect, the variable display mode of the first identification information is of a predetermined type according to the number of the first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied. Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A corresponding group 1 that can change whether or not it is selected from among, and remains at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied. The non-winning first identification information stop display mode A corresponding group 2 in which it is definite that the variable display mode of the first identification information is selected from the specific types Have,
Fluctuating display of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied In the aspect, regardless of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied, the variable display manner of the first identification information is within the specified type. It becomes definite to be selected from
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied before the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied after the certain first hold occurs. In advance, the stop display mode of the first identification information scheduled to be determined in advance is determined, and the pre-determination result is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the condition for suggesting or informing the player of the pending read-ahead information in advance is different from the case.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (5),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means for controlling to display the one identification information (for example,
First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the win/no win determination result based on the first random number is non-win, and the second identification when the win/no win determination result based on the second random number is non-win There are also multiple types of information related to stop display of information,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode B and at least a non-winning first identification information stop display mode C,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode C is configured to be relatively long.
As the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning and the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning B and at least a non-winning second identification information stop display mode C,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there is a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is easier to open than the non-open easy state. And
In the case of the non-opening easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information Depending on whether the stop display mode B is the stop display mode or the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode C, the variable display mode of the first identification information is changed. The selection tendency of is different,
In the case of the easy opening state, when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop Depending on whether the display mode B is the stop display mode of the second identification information or the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C, the variable display mode of the second identification information is changed. The selection tendency is different,
In the non-opening easy state, when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information Regardless of whether the display mode is the stop display mode B or the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C, the variable display mode of the second identification information is displayed. The selection tendency is the same, or, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information according to which is, there is no relative difference compared to the case of the easy opening state,
When configuring so that the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information is different,
When the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold According to the number of the first pending remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding, while the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may be different,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning first identification information stop display mode. When it becomes C, it relates to the variable display period of the first identification information regardless of the number of the first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied. The average value becomes uniform,
When configuring so that the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information is different,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied, the certain second hold According to the number of the second hold remaining at the time of satisfying the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding, while the average value related to the variable display period of the second identification information may be different,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning second identification information stop display mode. When it becomes C, it relates to the variable display period of the second identification information regardless of the number of the second holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied. It is configured so that the average value is uniform,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B In the case of the information stop display mode C, the variable display period of the first identification information is configured to be relatively longer, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second time. More than the variable display period of the second identification information in the case of the identification information stop display mode B, the second identification information of the second identification information in the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C is displayed. The variable display period is designed to be relatively long,
The stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the result of the determination of success or failure based on the first random number is non-winning is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B than the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A It is configured to be difficult and less likely to be the non-winning first identification information stop display mode C than the non-winning first identification information stop display mode C,
The stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is non-winning is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B than the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be difficult and less likely to be in the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C than in the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C.
Note that the selection tendency in the above may be derived from the variation pattern or the retention number. If it is derived from the variation pattern, the variation pattern or type selected is different, while if it is derived from the number of holdings, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining holdings at the time of holding digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (6),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying identification information,
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit (for example, the random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that a hold occurs. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30),
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. And a game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the win/no win determination result based on the random number is selected and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize (for example, the first special winning a prize C10, the second special winning a prize C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. And a special game control means (eg, special game control means MP30) capable of executing the special game to be obtained,
At least a non-winning identification information stop display mode A and a non-winning identification information stop display mode B are provided as types related to the identification information stop display mode in the case where the winning/disapproval determination result based on the random number is non-winning. Cage,
Identification when the stop display mode of the identification information is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B rather than the variable display period of the identification information when the stop display mode of the identification information is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of information is configured to be relatively long,
After the occurrence of a certain hold, and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold, the player is instructed in advance to hold prefetch information indicating the existence of the certain hold to the player or It is possible to inform,
After the occurrence of a certain hold, and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold, the stop display of the identification information scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied If the pre-judgment is performed and the pre-judgment result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B, the hold prefetch information can be suggested or notified to the player in advance, while the pre-judgment is performed. When the result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the holding prefetch information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or the pre-judgment result is the non-winning identification information stop display. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that, compared to the case of the mode B, the frequency of suggesting or notifying the holding prefetch information to the player in advance is relatively reduced.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (7),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying identification information,
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit (for example, the random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that a hold occurs. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30),
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. And a game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the win/no win determination result based on the random number is selected and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize (for example, the first special winning a prize C10, the second special winning a prize C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. And a special game control means (eg, special game control means MP30) capable of executing the special game to be obtained,
The types related to the stop display mode of the identification information when the win/no determination result based on the random number is non-win are the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and the non-winning identification information And at least a stop display mode C,
Identification when the stop display mode of the identification information is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C rather than the variable display period of the identification information when the stop display mode of the identification information is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of information is configured to be relatively long,
When the stop display mode of the identification information is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain hold is Depending on the number of reservations remaining at the time of satisfying, while the average value related to the variable display period of the identification information may differ,
When the stop display mode of the identification information becomes the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, the certain hold Is configured such that the average value relating to the variable display period of the identification information is uniform, regardless of the number of holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied.
After the occurrence of a certain hold, and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold, the player is instructed in advance to hold prefetch information indicating the existence of the certain hold to the player or It is possible to inform,
After the occurrence of a certain hold, and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold, the stop display of the identification information scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied When the mode is pre-judged and the pre-judgment result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the hold prefetch information is suggested to the player in advance. Alternatively, if the preliminary determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, on the other hand, the holding prefetch information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or Compared with the case where the determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the frequency of suggesting or notifying the holding prefetch information to the player in advance is relative. When the pre-determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and when the pre-determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the frequencies of suggesting or notifying the reservation prefetch information to the player in advance are different.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (8),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content determination) that performs a win/fail determination based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the win/fail determination result. Means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
A second game content determination means (e.g., game content determination) that performs a win/fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the win/no judgment result. Means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the win/no win determination result based on the first random number is non-win, and the second identification when the win/no win determination result based on the second random number is non-win There are also multiple types of information related to stop display of information,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
As the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning and the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning At least B and,
The stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification than the variable display period of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A. In the case of the information stop display mode B, the variable display period of the second identification information is configured to be relatively longer,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, it has a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is easier to open than the non-open easy state,
In the case of the easy opening state and in the non-opening easier state than the variable display period of the second identification information when the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B, and When the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B, the variable display period of the second identification information is configured to be relatively short. It is a characteristic pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Second identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second identification information (for example,
First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the win/no win determination result based on the first random number is non-win, and the second identification when the win/no win determination result based on the second random number is non-win There are also multiple types of information related to stop display of information,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
As the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning and the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning At least B and,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there is a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is easier to open than the non-open easy state. And
In the case of the non-opening easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first mode. Depending on which of the cases is the identification information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information is different,
In the case of the easy opening state, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification. The selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information differs depending on whether the information stop display mode B is set,
As a game state that depends at least when determining the variation display mode of the second identification information, the first variation state and the second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different compared to the first variation state. With a state, during the period in which the easy opening state is maintained, the transition of the gaming state from the first variation state to the second variation state can occur,
A tendency of selecting the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the easy opening state and the first change state , A tendency of selecting the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the easy opening state and the second change state It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that and are configured to be different.
Note that the selection tendency in the above may be derived from the variation pattern or the retention number. If it is derived from the variation pattern, the variation pattern or type selected is different, while if it is derived from the number of holdings, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining holdings at the time of holding digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the first acquired random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the first hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the win/fail judgment. A first game content deciding means (for example, game content deciding means MN) for deciding a display mode and a variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the random number and controls so that the second hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second identification information is stopped based on the win/fail judgment result. Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information,
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the win/fail judgment result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is win and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) can be advantageous for the player. Equipped with
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information in the case where the win/no win determination result based on the first random number is non-win, and the second identification when the win/no win determination result based on the second random number is non-win There are also multiple types of information related to stop display of information,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
As the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information in the case where the win/fail judgment result based on the second random number is non-win, the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning and the second identification information stop display mode at non-winning At least B and,
The stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification than the variable display period of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A. In the case of the information stop display mode B, the variable display period of the second identification information is configured to be relatively longer,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there is a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is easier to open than the non-open easy state. And
In the case of the easy opening state and in the non-opening easier state than the variable display period of the second identification information when the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B, and The variable display period of the second identification information when the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively short.
In the case of the non-opening easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first mode. Depending on which of the cases is the identification information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information is different,
In the case of the easy opening state, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the non-winning second identification. The selection tendency of the variable display mode of the second identification information differs depending on whether the information stop display mode B is set,
As a game state that depends at least when determining the variation display mode of the second identification information, the first variation state and the second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different compared to the first variation state. With a state, during the period in which the easy opening state is maintained, the transition of the gaming state from the first variation state to the second variation state can occur,
A tendency of selecting the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the easy opening state and the first change state , A tendency of selecting the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A in the easy opening state and the second change state It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that and are configured to be different.
Note that the selection tendency in the above may be derived from the variation pattern or the retention number. If it is derived from the variation pattern, the variation pattern or type selected is different, while if it is derived from the number of holdings, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining holdings at the time of holding digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (11),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls display control of effects,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the first random number, and a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number, and a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side. MT) and
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, it is a period of maintaining the state where the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and within the predetermined period, the variable display of the first identification information is started. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is stopped for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period, which is a period in which the displayed state is maintained and a variable display start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied within the specific period, can be provided. Is configured as
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M),
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display control unit (for example, for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
First identification information display fixed period will be provided during the variable display of the first identification information effect display content, and the second identification information display fixed period will be provided variable display of the second identification information It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the effect display content displayed inside can be the same effect display content.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (12),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the first random number, and a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number, and a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Two second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the two identification information,
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, it is a period of maintaining the state where the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and within the predetermined period, the variable display of the first identification information is started. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the state where the second identification information is stopped and displayed for a specific period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. In the specific period, the second identification information display fixed period, which is a period during which the variable display start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied, is configured to be provided.
The first identification information display fixed period provided when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first identification information display fixed period provided in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be a different period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the predetermined ball inlet (for example, , The second main game starting opening B10) is easy to enter the game ball as compared to the state where the game ball can enter or is closed, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls display control of effects,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) that performs a win/fail judgment based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/no judgment result.
According to the determination by the game content determination means, an identification information display control means (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) that controls to display the identification information in a variable display on the identification information display portion and then stop the identification information.
After the win/no win determination result based on the random number is selected and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning a prize (for example, the first special winning a prize C10, the second special winning a prize C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. When the special game to be obtained can be executed and the stop display mode of the identification information is a predetermined type mode, the predetermined prize to the variable winning port (for example, the first special winning port C10, the second special winning port C20) A first special game in which a unit game in which a variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first special winning prize C10, a second special winning prize C20) can be opened is executed a plurality of times until there are a certain number of balls or a predetermined period has elapsed. When the stop display mode of the identification information is a specific type mode different from the predetermined type mode, the variable winning opening (for example, the first special winning opening C10, the second special winning opening C20) Second execution of a unit game in which the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first prize winning mouth C10, the second prize winning mouth C20) can be opened until a predetermined number of balls have entered or a predetermined period has elapsed Special game control means for executing a special game (for example, special game control means MP30),
There is a low-probability lottery state in which the win/loss determination result is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the win/loss determination result is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, before and after the execution of the first special game. , While controlling so that the game state related to the low-probability lottery state and the high-probability lottery state can change, before and after the execution of the second special game, the game state relating to the low-probability lottery state and the high-probability lottery state changes Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that controls not to do so,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side. MT) and
As the content of execution of the first special game, one of a first high profit special game in which the expected number of prize balls is a predetermined number and a first low profit special game in which the expected number of prize balls is less than the predetermined number are executed. Is possible,
When the stop display mode of the identification information is the first stop display mode among the predetermined types of modes, the high probability lottery state is set after the first high profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is In the case of the second stop display mode of the predetermined type of mode, after the first low profit special game is executed, it becomes a low probability lottery state, and the stop display mode of the identification information is of the predetermined type of mode. In the case of the third stop display mode of, it is configured to be in a high probability lottery state after the first low profit special game is executed,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) is
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game part,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display control unit (for example, for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
After the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, it is possible to display predetermined effect display contents, and when the predetermined effect display contents are displayed, identification information is displayed. Is displayed as a unit after the variable display is displayed until the display is stopped, and the predetermined rendering is performed until the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number after the predetermined rendering display content is displayed. It is configured to continuously display the display content,
When the special game is executed due to the stop display mode of the identification information being the first stop display mode on the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side, the main game unit (for example, main control) When a special game is executed because the stop display mode of the identification information on the board M) side is the second stop display mode, the identification information on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side When a special game is executed due to the stop display mode being the third stop display mode, and the stop display mode of the identification information on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side is When the special game is executed due to being a specific type of aspect, it is configured so that the effect display content common in any of the above can be displayed as the predetermined effect display content,
It is a numerical value that suggests or informs the period during which the predetermined effect display content is continuously displayed after the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, and the numerical value is large. It is configured to set, as the predetermined number of times, a numerical value determined so that the degree of expectation of becoming a high-probability lottery state after the special game is executed is high.
After the special game is executed on the main game section (for example, the main control board M) side, the number of times of repeating the one unit has reached the predetermined number of times after the display of the predetermined effect display contents is started. After that, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the main gaming section (for example, the main control board M) is configured to definitely notify the player whether or not the high probability lottery state is established. Is.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (14),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, a second starting port (for example, the second) A game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls display control of effects,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
A first random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). ,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the first random number, and a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A first game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display one identification information,
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main gaming starting opening B10). ,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is executed based on the second random number, and a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. A second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side. MT) and
As the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the win/no determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode A and the non-winning first identification information stop displaying mode At least B and,
The stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, it is a period of maintaining the state where the first identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and within the predetermined period, the variable display of the first identification information is started. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period when the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is stopped for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A period for maintaining the displayed state, a second identification information display fixed period, which is a period during which the variable display start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied within the specific period, is provided. Cage,
The first identification information display fixed period is at least one of the first period and the second period longer than the first period, and the first identification information display fixed period is the second identification information display fixed It is configured to be relatively longer than the period,
As a first identification information display fixed period when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B, at least the second period is configured to be taken,
In the predetermined gaming state, even if the variable display period of the first identification information and the variable display period of the second identification information are the same, the first identification information display fixed period and the second identification information display fixed period Are configured differently,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M),
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission/reception control unit SM40), the effect display control unit (for example, for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
When the first identification information display fixed period takes the first period, and when the first identification information display fixed period takes the second period, the effect displayed in the first identification information display fixed period It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so that display contents can be changed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B),
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and the random number temporary storage means is controlled so that the hold occurs (first and second). Main game state temporary storage means MB10-C),
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win/fail judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/fail judgment result. And a game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information display control means (for example, the first information display control means for controlling to display the identification information in a variable display on the identification information display part and then stop the identification information).・Second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C) is provided,
It is a period in which the identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the variable display start condition of the identification information is newly satisfied within the predetermined period. There is a fixed period for identification information display
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the certain hold, the game content scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied is determined in advance. It is possible, and based on the result of the preliminary determination, the pachinko characterized in that it is configured to change the identification information display fixed period provided before the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold is satisfied. It is a game machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect (16),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display section A21g, second
Main game symbol display section B21g),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with a sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) that controls display control of effects,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20), a random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means) that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied. MJ30),
A win/loss determination means (for example, a win/loss lottery means MN10) that performs a win/fail determination based on the random number when the win/no determination permission condition is satisfied;
Identification information display content determining means (for example, symbol content determining means MN40) that determines stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination.
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) that controls the stop identification information to stop and display after the variable display.
If the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) that executes a special game that is advantageous to
After the execution of the special game, there is a low-probability lottery state in which the result of the win/win determination is a predetermined probability of winning In the high-probability lottery state, if it is in the high-probability lottery state, the unit from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display is counted from the end of execution of the special game, and the unit is repeated. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, a lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second variation is the second period in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is different from the first period. It has at least a period state and is controlled so that it can be in the first variable period state in the specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game. If it is in the first variable period state, the execution of the special game is finished. After reaching a specific number of times that the number of repetitions of the one unit is less than the predetermined number of times calculated later, a variable period state control unit (for example, limited frequency variation mode determination) that can be controlled to be in the second variable period state Means MN52),
It is means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S), and satisfies the hit/absence determination permission condition. And a game information transmission unit (for example, information transmission control unit MT) capable of transmitting in advance information regarding the holding to the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side,
In the case of the first fluctuation period state, the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of holdings, and the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number. When the number of second holdings is greater than the number, the average value of the variable display period of the identification information in the case where the result of the win/fail determination when the win/win determination permission condition is satisfied is non-win While mean value difference occurs,
In the case of the second variation period state, the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied as the average value of the variable display period of the identification information when the result of the determination/non-winning when the determination result permission condition is satisfied is not won. The average value difference for the predetermined period according to the number of holdings at the time does not occur (or smaller than the average value difference in the case of the first fluctuation period state),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M),
When the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10) receives the information on the hold, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information on the hold, the existence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition. And a hold destination reading effect display control means (for example, hold destination reading effect execution control means SM26) for controlling so that the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) can display the hold destination reading effect display contents. ,
When it is planned to reach the specific number of times by the execution of the one unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold prefetching effect display content is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device). It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it can be hidden by SG).

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game starting mouth entrance judging means MJ11-B 2nd main game starting entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C10 1st prize winning entrance judgment Means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary Storage means MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MN game content determination Means, MN10 win/loss lottery means MN11-A First main game win/win lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game win/win lottery table MN11-B Second main game win/win lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game win/win lottery table MN11-H auxiliary game win/loss lottery means, MN11ta-H auxiliary game win/loss lottery table MN20 special game transition decision means, MN40 symbol content decision means MN41-A first main game symbol decision means, MN41ta-A first main game symbol decision For lottery table MN41-B second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 fluctuation mode determination means , MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MN52 limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, MN52c limited frequency counter AMN52c-2 limited frequency counter B , MN52b Limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer M P11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP20-B 2nd main game starting opening electric auditors opening/closing control means, MP21-B 2nd main gaming starting opening electric auditors opening/closing condition determination Means MP22t-B 2nd main game starting opening electric auditors' product release timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C 1st Second big winning opening electric auditors opening and closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means , MP50 specific game control means MP51 probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 time reduction end condition determination means MP52c time reduction counter, MB game state temporary storage means MB10-C first/second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first -Second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means MT information transmission Control means MT10 buffer for command transmission, MH prize ball payout determination means A first main game peripheral device, A10 first main game start opening A11s first main game start entrance ball detection device, A20 first main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display section, A21h 1st main game symbol reservation display section B 2nd main game peripheral equipment, B10 2nd main game start mouth B11s 2nd main game start mouth entrance detection device, B11d 2nd main game start Mouth electric accessory B20 second main game symbol display device, B21g second main game symbol display unit B21h second main game symbol hold display unit, C first and second main game shared peripheral device C10 first big winning opening, C11s 1st big winning a prize winning detection device C11d 1st big winning a prize electric prize, C20 2nd big winning a prize C21s 2nd big prize winning a prize detection device, C21d 2nd prize winning electric prize H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display part, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display part S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative design display control means SM21n design drawing display content determination means, SM21ta design drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b temporary design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Design variation time management timer SM22 Design holding information display control means, SM22b Design holding information temporary storage means SM26 Hold prereading effect execution control means, SM26k Hold prereading effect executability judging means SM26b Preread related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awakening stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Advance notice effect display control means, SM24n Advance notice effect display content determination means SM24b Advance notice Production related information temporary storage means, SM25 reach production display control means SM25n Reach production display content determination means, SM25b Reach production related information temporary storage means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub information transmission/reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display section KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout apparatus

Claims (1)

A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning a prize mouth that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display productions,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls display control of production,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number storage unit that stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied,
Game content determination means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number, and determining a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win/no judgment result,
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part according to the determination by the game content determination means,
Special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize mouth can be in an advantageous state for the player, after the win/no win determination result based on the random number is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening than the normal game state, and is configured to be in the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game,
At least a first variation table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information in the specific game state, and a second variation table in which the first variation table has a different tendency of selecting the variation display time of the identification information. It has at least a first variation table reference state that refers to the first variation table in the specific gaming state and a second variation table reference state that refers to the second variation table in the specific gaming state,
The first variation table can be referred to in the specific period in the specific game state, and after the variation display of the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of execution of the special game, the second variation from the first variation table reference state. It is configured to be in a table reference state,
In the case of the first fluctuation table reference state, the number of holdings when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings A, and the number of holdings when the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is more than the number of holdings A. When the number of holdings B, which is a number, is different from the case where the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-win, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is different. (2) In the case of the fluctuation table reference state, when the number of holdings when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings A and when the number of holdings when the winning/failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the number of holdings B With, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information when the result of the win/loss judgment by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied is configured to be the same,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a special game in the effect display unit before satisfying the hit/absence determination permission condition,
The execution frequency of the prefetching effect is configured to be different between the case of the first variation table reference state and the case of the second variation table reference state,
If the pending display occurs before the second fluctuation table reference state is entered, but the variable display of the identification information related to the pending in the second fluctuation table reference state is scheduled, the second fluctuation It is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect corresponding to the hold during the variable display of the identification information prior to the table reference state,
In the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state, it is possible to execute a predetermined exclusive effect,
In the case where the result of the determination result corresponding to the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state is a non-winning or a winning, the dedicated effect can be executed, while (1) The effect content after executing the dedicated effect in the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the variation table reference state corresponds to the variation display of the last identification information in the specific period in the first variation table reference state. It is configured to differ depending on whether the result of the winning/disapproving judgment is non-winning or winning ,
The hold information A and the hold information B are at least held as hold information related to the hold that is scheduled to be the non-winning result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means when the win/loss determination permission condition is satisfied.
In the case of the first fluctuation table reference state, the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information when the hold corresponding to the hold information A satisfies the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition, and the hold corresponding to the hold information B is determined to be right or wrong. While the tendency of selection of the variable display time of the identification information when the permission condition is satisfied is different, while the second variation table reference state is satisfied, the hold corresponding to the hold information A satisfies the right/wrong determination permission condition. The tendency of selecting the variable display time of the identification information and the tendency of selecting the variable display time of the identification information when the hold corresponding to the hold information B satisfies the right/wrong judgment permission condition are configured to be the same.
The hold related to the hold information B is configured to be more likely to be a trigger to execute the prefetching effect than the hold related to the hold information A,
When all of the one or more reservations that satisfy the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition before the certain hold are the hold related to the hold information A, a predetermined prefetch effect can be executed for the certain hold.
If all of the one or more holds that satisfy the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition before the certain hold include the hold related to the hold information B instead of the hold related to the hold information A, a predetermined hold is performed for the certain hold. It is configured not to execute the prefetch effect of
As types of prefetching effect, at least prefetching effect A that is a certain type of prefetching effect, and prefetching effect B that is a type of prefetching effect different from prefetching effect A are configured,
While the pre-reading effect A and the pre-reading effect B can be executed at the same time, it is possible to start the execution of the pre-reading effect B while the pre-reading effect A is being executed, and it is displayed by the variable display of the previous identification information. Pre-reading effect A in a display mode different from the display mode of the pre-reading effect A, and in a display mode different from the display mode of the pre-reading effect B displayed in the variable display of the previous identification information. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to differ from the timing of displaying B.

Images